section 02 41 13.13 removing existing pavement and … · a. aci 117 - standard specifications for...
TRANSCRIPT
REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND STRUCTURES Section 02 41 13.13 - 1
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
SECTION 02 41 13.13 – REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND STRUCTURES
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Removing concrete paving, asphaltic concrete pavement, brick pavement and base courses.
B. Removing concrete curbs, concrete curbs and gutters, sidewalks and driveways.
C. Removing pipe culverts, sewers, and sewer leads.
D. Removing existing inlets and manholes.
E. Removing and disposing of pre-stressed concrete beams and drill shafts.
F. Removing miscellaneous structures of concrete or masonry.
G. Removing existing bridge.
1.2 REGULARTORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to applicable codes for disposal of debris.
B. Coordinate removal work with utility companies.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
Not Used
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Obtain advance approval from ENGINEER for dimensions and limits of removal work.
B. Identify known utilities below grade. Stake and flag locations.
3.2 PROTECTION
A. Protect following from damage or displacement:
1. Adjacent public and private property.
2. Trees, plants, and other landscape features designated to remain.
3. Utilities designated to remain.
4. Pavement and utility structures designated to remain.
REMOVING EXISTING PAVEMENT AND STRUCTURES Section 02 41 13.13 - 2
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
5. Bench marks, monuments, and existing structures designated to remain.
3.3 REMOVALS
A. Remove pavements and structures by methods that will not damage underground utilities. Do not use
drop hammer near existing underground utilities.
B. Minimize amount of earth loaded during removal operations.
C. Where existing pavement is to remain, make straight saw cuts in existing pavement to provide clean
breaks prior to removal. Do not break concrete pavement or base with drop hammer unless concrete or
base has been saw cut to minimum depth of 2 inches.
D. When street and driveway saw cut location is greater than one-half of pavement lane width, remove
pavement for full lane width or to nearest longitudinal joint as directed by ENGINEER.
E. Remove sidewalks and curbs to nearest existing dummy, expansion, or construction joint.
F. Where existing end of pipe culvert or end of sewer is to remain, install 8-inch-thick masonry plug in
pipe end prior to backfill in accordance with requirements of Section 02316 Structural Excavation and
Backfill.
3.4 BACKFILL
A. Backfill of removal areas shall be in accordance with requirements of Section 02316 Structural
Excavation and Backfill.
3.5 DISPOSAL
A. Inlet frames, grates, and plates; and manhole frames and covers, may remain OWNER property.
Disposal shall be in accordance with applicable local, state and federal laws.
B. Remove from site, debris resulting from work under this section in accordance with applicable local,
state and federal laws.
END OF DOCUMENT
CONCRETE FORMWORK AND ACCESSORIES Section 03 10 00 - 1
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
SECTION 03 10 00 - CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, include General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to work of this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes formwork, shoring, re-shoring, back-shoring, falsework, bracing, and other temporary
supports required to form and support all Cast-in-Place concrete shown on the Drawings.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Specification Section 01400 “Quality Control” for requirements of material testing and
inspection.
2. Specification Section 01410 “Testing Laboratory Services” for inspection requirements
associated with forming and accessories.
3. Specification Section 03 20 00 “Concrete Reinforcing” for reinforcements associated with
Cast-in-Place Concrete.
4. Specification Section 03 30 00 “Cast-In-Place Concrete” for Cast-in-Place concrete and
related products.
5. Specification Section 04 20 00 “Unit Masonry” for reinforcements associated with Unit
Masonry and related products.
6. Specification Section 05 12 00 “Structural Steel Framing” for placement of embedded steel
anchors and plates in Cast-in-Place concrete.
7. Specification Section 05 21 00 “Steel Joist Framing” for placement of embedded steel
anchors, plates and joist seats in Cast-in-Place concrete.
8. Specification Section 05 31 00 “Steel Decking” for placement of steel anchors in steel
decking.
1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010
(Reapproved 2015).
B. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete; 2016.
C. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary; 2014 (Errata 2017).
D. ACI 347R - Guide to Formwork for Concrete; 2014.
E. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2018.
CONCRETE FORMWORK AND ACCESSORIES Section 03 10 00 - 2
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
1.4 RESPONSIBILTY
A. The design, construction, and safety of all formwork shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. All
forms, shores, re-shores, back-shores, falsework, bracing, and other temporary supports shall be
engineered to support all loads imposed including the wet weight of concrete, construction equipment,
live loads, lateral loads due to wind and wet concrete imbalance. The Contractor shall also be
responsible for determining when temporary supports, shores, re-shores, back-shores, and other
bracing may be safely removed.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01300 “Submittals” for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide data on void form materials and installation requirements.
C. Shop Drawings: Indicate pertinent dimensions, materials, bracing, and arrangement of joints and ties.
D. Formwork Shop Drawings: Formwork drawings shall be submitted for Owner’s record and reviewed
by the Engineer for conformance to structure drawing layout only. Such shop drawings shall indicate
types of materials, sizes, lengths, connection details, design allowance for construction loads, anchors,
form ties, shores, braces, construction joints, reveals, camber, openings, formwork coatings and all
other pertinent information in ACI 347.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver prefabricated forms and installation instructions in manufacturer's packaging.
B. Store prefabricated forms off ground in ventilated and protected manner to prevent deterioration from
moisture.
C. Protect plastic foam products from damage and exposure to sunlight.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 FORMWORK - GENERAL
A. Provide concrete forms, accessories, shoring, and bracing as required to accomplish cast-in-place
concrete work.
B. Design and construct concrete that complies with design with respect to shape, lines, and dimensions.
C. Chamfer outside corners of beams, joists, columns, and walls.
CONCRETE FORMWORK AND ACCESSORIES Section 03 10 00 - 3
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
2.2 FORMWORK ACCESSORIES
A. Form Ties: Removable type, galvanized metal, fixed length, cone type, with waterproofing washer, 1
½-inch back break dimension, free of defects that could leave holes larger than 1 inch (25 mm) in
concrete surface.
B. Form Release Agent: Capable of releasing forms from hardened concrete without staining or
discoloring concrete or forming bugholes and other surface defects, compatible with concrete and form
materials, and not requiring removal for satisfactory bonding of coatings to be applied.
1. Composition: Colorless reactive, mineral oil-based, soy-based, or vegetable-oil based
compound.
2. Do not use materials containing diesel oil or petroleum-based compounds.
3. VOC Content: In compliance with applicable local, State, and federal regulations.
4. Products:
a. SpecChem, LLC; Bio Strip WB (water-based): www.specchemllc.com/sle.
b. W. R. Meadows, Inc; Duogard: www.wrmeadows.com/sle.
C. Dowel Sleeves: Plastic sleeve and nailable plastic base for smooth, round, steel load-transfer dowels.
D. Dovetail Anchor Slot: Galvanized steel, at least 22 gage, 0.0299 inch (0.76 mm) thick, foam filled,
release tape sealed slots, anchors for securing to concrete formwork.
E. Flashing Reglets: Galvanized steel, at least 22 gage, 0.0299 inch (0.76 mm) thick, longest possible
lengths, with alignment splines for joints, foam filled, release tape sealed slots, anchors for securing to
concrete formwork.
F. Nails, Spikes, Lag Bolts, Through Bolts, Anchorages: Sized as required, of sufficient strength and
character to maintain formwork in place while placing concrete.
G. Embedded Anchor Shapes, Plates, Angles and Bars: As specified in Section 05 12 00 “Structural
Steel”.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify lines, levels and centers before proceeding with formwork. Ensure that dimensions agree with
drawings.
3.2 ERECTION - FORMWORK
A. Erect formwork, shoring and bracing to achieve design requirements, in accordance with requirements
of ACI 301.
B. Provide bracing to ensure stability of formwork. Shore or strengthen formwork subject to
overstressing by construction loads.
CONCRETE FORMWORK AND ACCESSORIES Section 03 10 00 - 4
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
C. Install permanent insulated foam panel formwork per manufacturer's recommendations.
D. Arrange and assemble formwork to permit dismantling and stripping. Do not damage concrete during
stripping. Permit removal of remaining principal shores.
E. Align joints and make watertight. Keep form joints to a minimum.
F. Obtain approval before framing openings in structural members that are not indicated on drawings.
G. Coordinate this section with other sections of work that require attachment of components to
formwork.
H. If formwork is placed after reinforcement, resulting in insufficient concrete cover over reinforcement,
request instructions from Architect before proceeding.
3.3 APPLICATION - FORM RELEASE AGENT
A. Apply form release agent on formwork in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Apply prior to placement of reinforcing steel, anchoring devices, and embedded items.
3.4 INSERTS, EMBEDDED PARTS, AND OPENINGS
A. Provide formed openings where required for items to be embedded in passing through concrete work.
B. Locate and set in place items that will be cast directly into concrete.
C. Coordinate with work of other sections in forming and placing openings, slots, reglets, recesses,
sleeves, bolts, anchors, other inserts, and components of other work.
D. Position recessed anchor slots for brick veneer masonry anchors to spacing and intervals specified in
Section 04 20 01.
E. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, so they are straight, level, and
plumb. Ensure items are not disturbed during concrete placement.
F. Install waterstops in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, so they are continuous without
displacing reinforcement. Heat seal joints so they are watertight.
3.5 FORM CLEANING
A. Clean forms as erection proceeds, to remove foreign matter within forms.
B. Clean and protect permanent insulated concrete foam panel formwork per manufacturer's
recommendations.
C. Clean formed cavities of debris prior to placing concrete.
CONCRETE FORMWORK AND ACCESSORIES Section 03 10 00 - 5
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
1. Flush with water or use compressed air to remove remaining foreign matter. Ensure that
water and debris drain to exterior through clean-out ports.
2. During cold weather, remove ice and snow from within forms. Do not use de-icing salts. Do
not use water to clean out forms, unless formwork and concrete construction proceed within
heated enclosure. Use compressed air or other means to remove foreign matter.
3.6 FORMWORK TOLERANCES
A. Construct permanent insulated foam panel formwork to maintain tolerances required by ACI 301.
3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. An independent testing agency will perform field quality control tests, as specified in Section 01400 –
“Quality Requirements”.
B. Inspect erected formwork, shoring, and bracing to ensure that work is in accordance with formwork
design, and to verify that supports, fastenings, wedges, ties, and items are secure.
C. Do not reuse wood formwork more than two (2) times for concrete surfaces to be exposed to view. Do
not patch formwork.
3.8 FORM REMOVAL
A. Do not remove forms or bracing until concrete has gained sufficient strength to carry its own weight
and imposed loads.
B. Loosen forms carefully. Do not wedge pry bars, hammers, or tools against finish concrete surfaces
scheduled for exposure to view.
C. Store removed forms to prevent damage to form materials or to fresh concrete. Discard damaged
forms.
END OF SECTION
CONCRETE REINFORCING Section 03 20 00 - 1
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 1, 2018
SECTION 03 20 00 – CONCRETE REINFORCING
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provision of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
other Division 01 Specification Sections apply to work of this Section.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. The work of this Section includes labor, materials, hardware, equipment, transportation and services
required to fabricate and place all reinforcement for Cast-in-Place concrete including bars, welded wire
fabric, ties and supports shown on the Drawings and as specified.
B. Related Sections:
1. Specification Section 03 10 00 “Concrete Forming and Accessories”
2. Specification Section 04 20 00 “Unit Masonry”
1.3 REFERENCES
Comply with all provisions of the following codes, specifications and standards except where more
stringent requirements are shown or specified.
A. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete; 2016.
B. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary; 2014 (Errata 2017).
C. ACI SP-66 - ACI Detailing Manual; 2004.
D. ASTM A1094/A1094M - Standard Specification for Continuous Hot-Dip Galvanized Steel Bars for
Concrete Reinforcement; 2016.
E. ASTM A615/A615M - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars for Concrete
Reinforcement; 2016.
F. ASTM A641/A641M - Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire; 2009a
(Reapproved 2014).
G. ASTM A704/A704M - Standard Specification for Welded Steel Plain Bar or Rod Mats for Concrete
Reinforcement; 2017.
H. ASTM A706/A706M - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Low-Alloy Steel Bars for
Concrete Reinforcement; 2016.
I. ASTM A767/A767M - Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Bars for Concrete
Reinforcement; 2016.
CONCRETE REINFORCING Section 03 20 00 - 2
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 1, 2018
J. ASTM A996/A996M - Standard Specification for Rail-Steel and Axle-Steel Deformed Bars for
Concrete Reinforcement; 2016.
K. ASTM A1064/A1064M - Standard Specification for Carbon-Steel Wire and Welded Wire
Reinforcement, Plain and Deformed, for Concrete; 2017.
L. ASTM D3963/D3963M - Standard Specification for Fabrication and Jobsite Handling of Epoxy-
Coated Steel Reinforcing Bars; 2015.
M. AWS D1.4/D1.4M - Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel; 2011.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01300 – “Submittals”, for submittal procedures.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Shop drawings and samples for all reinforcing steel and related accessories shall be submitted
for Engineer’s approval.
2. Shop drawings shall show layout, bending and assembly diagrams, bar schedules, stirrup
spacing, splicing and laps of bars and shall be prepared in accordance with ACI 301.
1.5 TESTING AND INSPECTION
A. Perform all tests and inspections specified in Laboratory Testing Section of these Specifications.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 REINFORCEMENT
A. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615/A615M, Grade 60 (60,000 psi) and Grade 40. See Drawings.
1. Plain billet-steel bars
2. Galvanized in accordance with ASTM A767/A767M, Class I.
3. ASTM A706/A706M, deformed low-alloy steel bars.
4. Deformed bars, ASTM A996/A996M Grade 40 (280), Type A.
B. Welded Wire Fabric:
1. Welded smooth wire fabric
2. Welded deformed wire fabric
3. All welded wire fabric shall be furnished in flat sheets only.
C. Tie Wire:
1. Annealed steel tie wire, minimum 16-gauge
2. Plastic coated or stainless-steel tie wire in concrete structures and all architectural concrete.
CONCRETE REINFORCING Section 03 20 00 - 3
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 1, 2018
D. Support for Reinforcement: Provide supports for reinforcement including bolsters, chairs, spacers and
other devices for spacing, supporting and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire fabric in place.
Use wire bar-type supports complying with CRSI recommendations.
2.2 RE-BAR SPLICING
A. Splice Type and Lap Lengths: Required slice type and lap lengths are defined on the Drawings. Lap
splice lengths for unscheduled bars not shown otherwise on the Drawings shall be 40 bar diameters
minimum.
PART 3 - EXECCUTION
3.1 FABRICATION
A. Bending and Forming: Fabricate bars of indicated sizes and accurately form to shapes and lengths
indicated and required by methods not injurious to materials. Do not heat reinforcement for bending.
Bars with kinks or bends not scheduled will be rejected.
3.2 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Marking and Shipping: Bundle reinforcement and tag with suitable identification to facilitate sorting
and placing.
B. Transport and store at site so as not to damage material. Keep sufficient supply of tested, approved and
proper reinforcement at the site to avoid delays.
C. Maintain reinforcing bars free of mud, dirt, grease or other coatings.
3.3 PLACEMENT
A. Reinforcing Steel
1. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice and other materials which reduce
or destroy bond with concrete.
2. Place, support and secure reinforcement against displacement.
a. Place reinforcement to obtain at least minimum coverages for concrete protection.
b. Arrange, space and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in
position during concrete placement. Do not deviate from required position.
c. Set wire ties so ends are directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete
surfaces.
3. Install welded wire fabric in a long lengths as practicable.
a. Lap adjoining pieces at least one (1) full mesh plus 2-inches and lace splice with
wire.
b. Off-set laps in adjacent widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction.
c. Welded fabric shall be furnished and placed in flat sheets only.
4. Do not displace or damage vapor barrier.
CONCRETE REINFORCING Section 03 20 00 - 4
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 1, 2018
5. Extend reinforcement continuous through construction joints or, if approved on the shop
drawings, provide dowels of sufficient length to develop the full tension or compression
strength of the bar as applicable.
6. Accommodate placement of formed openings.
a. Place additional reinforcing steel at all sleeves and openings in beams, slabs and
walls as specified in the Drawings.
b. Where reinforcement is interrupted by sleeves or openings not shown on the
drawings, consult with Engineer for instructions for placing and splicing of bars.
c. Provide required additional reinforcing steel at no additional cost to Owner.
B. Welded Wire Fabric
1. Wherever welded wire fabric is specified as reinforcement in slabs, it shall be continuous and
properly lapped one full wire spacing plus 2-inches across the entire concrete surface and not
interrupted by beam or girders.
3.4 REINFORCING STEEL SPACING
A. Parallel Reinforcement:
1. Distance between parallel bars in a layer shall be not less than the bar diameter nor 1-inch.
2. Where parallel reinforcement is placed in two (2) or more layers, bars in upper layer shall be
placed directly above bars in the lower layer with clear distance between layers of not less
than 1-inch.
3.5 SPLICING
A. Lap splices in reinforcing steel shall be contact lap splices unless otherwise detailed on drawings.
B. Maintain proper coverage between reinforcing bars at splices.
C. Lap unscheduled reinforcing bars not otherwise specified a minimum of 40 bar diameter at splices.
3.6 SHRINKAGE AND TEMPERATURE REINFORCEMENT
A. Provide shrinkage and temperature reinforcement at right angles to main top and bottom bars for all
structural slabs unless detailed otherwise on Drawings.
1. See Drawings for sizes and spacings.
END OF SECTION
EPOXY RELATED WORK Section 03 21 16 - 1
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
SECTION 03 21 16 – EPOXY RELATED WORK
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of contract, including General and Supplemental Conditions and
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to the work of this Section.
1.2 SCOPE OF WORK
Installation of epoxy grouted dowels or reinforcing steel, and bonding fresh concrete to hardened
concrete. Such work shall be done by the Contractor in strict conformance to these specifications.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Applicable Standards
1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
ASTM C881 Standard Specification for Epoxy-Resin-Base Bonding Systems for
Concrete
2. American Concrete Institute (ACI)
ACI 503 R-93 Use of Epoxy Compounds with Concrete
ACI 503.1-92 Standard Specification for Bonding, Hardened Concrete, Steel, Wood,
Brick, and Other Materials to Hardened Concrete with a Multi-Component
Epoxy Adhesive
ACI 503.2 Standard Specification for Bonding Plastic Concrete to Hardened Concrete
with a Multi-Component Epoxy Adhesive
ACI 503.3 Standard Specification for Producing a Skid-Resistant Surface on Concrete
by the Use of Multi-Component Epoxy System
ACI 548.14-14 Standard Specification for Repairing Concrete with Epoxy Mortars
B. Manufacturer’s Qualifications: Companies furnishing the epoxy materials shall have a proven track
record of at least five years. Furthermore, they shall have in existence a program of training, certifying
and supporting a nationally organized program of approved contractors. Evidence of this shall be made
available to the Engineer/Architect upon request
C. Contractor’s Qualifications: Contractor performing the work shall be an approved contractor by the
manufacturer furnishing the epoxy materials and shall have no less than five years’ experience in the
various types of epoxy related work required in this project. A notarized certification from the
manufacturer attesting to the training shall be submitted to the Engineer/Architect along with the
proposal to do the work.
EPOXY RELATED WORK Section 03 21 16 - 2
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR EPOXY MATERIALS
A. All epoxy material shall be new and manufactured within the shelf life limitations set forth by the
manufacturer.
B. Epoxy shall be a two-part epoxy adhesive material and shall be of epichlorohydrin/amine type.
Polysulphide epoxies are not acceptable.
C. Epoxy used shall be insensitive to the presence of water and moisture and shall be capable of
application and of strength development even when applied to damp surfaces having a temperature of
40° or above.
D. Epoxy used shall develop a minimum strength of 2000 psi in tension and 4000 psi in compression at
the end of seven days.
E. Epoxies used shall not deteriorate under approximately 200 freeze thaw cycles.
F. Epoxies used shall be 100% solids without solvents.
G. Bonding and strength characteristics of epoxies shall be stable when exposed to ultraviolet rays
2.2 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS FOR EPOXY MORTARS
A. Epoxy mortar used for bonding, patching, and resurfacing, shall have the following additional
properties:
1. Epoxy mortar shall be non-sagging.
2. Sand used in preparing mortar shall be graded oven dry quartzite and furnished in bags.
3. The epoxy mortar patch material shall match the existing texture and color of exposed
concrete without giving a blotchy appearance. A test patch shall be applied for approval prior
to final acceptance of the mortar. Size of test patch shall be approximately equal to the size of
the average mortar patch to be used on the project.
2.3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR POLYMER MODIFIED CEMENTITIOUS MORTARS
A. Mortar used for bonding, patching, and resurfacing in exposed or exterior environmental conditions
with large cyclic temperature changes shall have the following properties:
1. Mortar shall be non-sagging.
2. Coefficient of thermal expansion shall be comparable with that of concrete (5.5 x 10-6
in/in/°F).
3. Sand used in preparing mortar shall be graded oven dry quartzite furnished in bags.
4. The mortar patch material shall match the existing texture and color of exposed concrete
without giving a blotchy appearance. A test patch shall be applied for approval prior to final
acceptance of the mortar. Size of test patch shall be approximately equal to the size of the
average mortar patch to be used on the project.
EPOXY RELATED WORK Section 03 21 16 - 3
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
2.4 PRODUCTS AND MANUFACTURERS
A. Epoxy Injection Work
1. Master Builders Technologies: Concresive 1380
2. E-Poxy Industries: Eva-Pox Injection Resin No. 4
3. Rescon Tehcnology Corp: Product R303, Concrete Injection Resin
4. Sika Chemical Corporation: Sikadur Hi-Mod LV or Sikadur 52 Injection Resin
5. Thermal-Chem, Inc.: Thermal-Chem Injection Resin, Product No. 2
6. Hilti: HIT HY 150/HIT-ICE, HIT RE500
B. Epoxy Mortar Patch
1. Master Builders Technologies: Concresive 1411 or 1482.
2. E-Poxy Industries: Eva-Pox Mortar Mix No. 3
3. Rescon Technology Corp.: Product No. R616, Concrete Bonder or Product No. R404, Epoxy
Mortar Resin.
4. Sika Chemical Corporation: Sikadur 31 Hi-Mod Gel or Sikadur 35 Hi-Mod LV.
5. Thermal-Chem, Inc.: Thermal-Chem Mortar Resin Product No. 3, Thermal-Chem Fibrous
Mortar Resin, Product No. 306 or Thermal-Chem Mortar Resin Gel, Product No. 304.
C. Epoxy for Bonding Fresh Concrete to Hardened Concrete
1. Master Builders Technologies: Concresive Liquid (LPL) or Concressive 3007.
2. E-Poxy Industries: Eva-Pox Fresh Concrete Bonder No. 2.
3. Rescon Technology Corp.: Product R649, Fresh Concrete Bonder.
4. Sika Chemical Corporation: Sikadur 32 Hi-Mod.
5. Thermal-Chem, Inc.: Thermal-Chem Wet Concrete Bonder, Product No. 5 or 501.
D. Epoxy for Grouting Bolts, Dowels or Reinforcing Steel
1. Master Builder Technologies: Concressive Liquid (LPL), Concressive 3007, Concressive
Paste (LPL) for horizontal use in conditioned spaces.
2. E-Poxy Industries: Eva-Pox Cold Cure Bonder No. 41.
3. Rescon Technology Corp.: Product No. R606, Concrete Bonder.
4. Sika Corporation: Sikadur 31 Hi-Mod Gel, (horizontal use); Sikadur 32 Hi-Mod or Sikadur 35
Hi-Mod LV (vertical use).
5. Thermal-Chem, Inc.: Thermal-Chem Bonder, Product No. 4, Normal Cure or Rapid Cure.
6. Hilti: HIT RE500
Substitutions may be considered provided complete technical information and job references are
furnished to the Architect/Engineer and approved prior to commencement of work.
Changes in products required to suit temperature and environmental conditions at the time of epoxy
application shall be specified as separate line items by the Contractor showing credit or additions to the
price for the various tasks.
In using the above products, follow strictly the manufacturer's specifications and directions for mixing
and application. Also heed all label warnings by manufacturer. Make application in accordance with
applicable safety laws.
EPOXY RELATED WORK Section 03 21 16 - 4
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 EPOXY MORTAR
A. Applicators Qualifications
1. Epoxy mortar repair work shall only be performed by contractors who have successfully used
this process on at least three similar structural repairs of equal scope which have performed
successfully for a minimum period of five years.
2. Only adequately trained and experienced personnel shall be used on the job.
B. Surface Preparation
1. Concrete surface to which the epoxy mortar is to be applied shall be exposed parent concrete
free of loose and unsound materials. Surface preparation shall be done by abrasive blasting,
waterblasting or as otherwise required by the manufacturer.
2. Necessary approvals shall be obtained by the Contractor from authorizing governmental or
other agencies prior to abrasive blasting. Abrasive blasting operations shall comply with the
requirements of OSHA and NIOSH (National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health)
Standard PB-246-697.
3. Surfaces shall be free of any deleterious materials such as laitance, dust, dirt, and oil.
4. Any exposed reinforcing steel shall also be cleaned and be free of rust and other
contaminants. Cleaning shall be accomplished by mechanical means. Use powered wire
brushes in locations where reinforcing steel cannot be cleaned by abrasive-blasting or water-
blasting. All exposed reinforcing steel shall be coated with a corrosion inhibiting product
specified elsewhere in this specification prior to mortar application.
5. Prime the cleaned surface with primer as required by the manufacturer.
C. Concrete Surface Inspection
1. Ensure that the surface temperature is at least 40°F to permit wetting of concrete surface by
epoxy coating.
2. The Contractor shall evaluate the moisture content of concrete surface receiving epoxy
mortar. This shall be done by determining if moisture will collect at bond lines between
concrete and epoxy mortar before epoxy has cured. Evaluate this by taping a piece of
polyethylene sheet to the concrete. If moisture collects on underside of the polyethylene sheet
before epoxy would cure, then allow concrete to dry sufficiently to prevent the possibility of
moisture between old concrete and new epoxy.
D. Mortar Application
1. Condition epoxy compound components to a temperature between 65°-80°F unless otherwise
recommended by the manufacturer. Epoxies beyond this range of temperature shall not be
used.
2. Stir each of the two parts of epoxy separately before mixing. Then mix in a clean container
free of contaminants.
3. Thoroughly blend epoxy components and sand with Jiffy mixers (made by The Jiffy Mixer
Co., Irvine, California) to a uniform and homogenous mixture. Small batches of one quart or
less may be mixed by spatulas, palette knives or similar devices.
4. Mixing should be accomplished well within the pot life of epoxy (three minutes when using
EPOXY RELATED WORK Section 03 21 16 - 5
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
Jiffy mixer or five minutes when mixed by hand) after allowing for time required for
application.
5. Apply mortar by trowel or other means suitable for the consistency of the epoxy-sand mortar
mix.
6. Build up the repair area in layers with mortar thicknesses within those specified by the
manufacturer (1/4" maximum per layer).
7. Consolidate the mortar thoroughly to remove entrapped air.
8. Finish surface of mortar to match the texture and contours of existing concrete.
9. Allow mortar to cure in accordance to manufacturers recommendations.
E. Cleanup
1. Protect surfaces surrounding the work areas against spillage.
2. Epoxy and epoxy mortar spillages shall be cleaned before they set and become difficult to
remove.
3. Cleanup all portions of the existing structure that are soiled or stained in the process of epoxy
mortar repair work.
3.2 EPOXY GROUTED BOLTS, DOWELS OR REINFORCING STEEL
A. Applicator’s Qualifications
1. Epoxy grouting of bolts, dowels, or reinforcing steel shall only be performed by contractors
who have had successful experience on a minimum of three (3) projects of similar scope.
2. Only adequately trained epoxy applicators shall be used on the job. Furnish current certificate
of training on request.
B. Surface Preparation
1. All bolts, dowels and reinforcing bars shall be abrasive blasted no more than eight hours
before the grouting. If evidence of oxidation exists on the surface, the bolts, reinforcing bars
and dowels shall be recleaned. Blast-clean surfaces using Steel Structures Painting Council,
Surface Preparation No. 6, to give a surface condition corresponding to ASa2, BSa2, CSa2 of
SSPC Vis 1, depending on the initial surface condition of the steel surface. Prior to blast-
cleaning, clean surfaces to conform to SSPC SP1, SP2, and SP3, as required.
2. All holes shall be clean of dust, debris, and contaminants. Use compressed air from an oil-
and-water-free compressed air source prior to epoxy application.
C. Drilling Holes for Embedment
1. Use only rotary-percussion type drills for drilling holes.
2. Drills shall be fitted with bits having single tooth that produce large cuttings, and hollow stem
drill rods that permit simultaneous blowing of compressed air providing immediate expulsion
of the cuttings from the hole.
3. Do not cut through any reinforcing steel unless indicated otherwise on the drawings. Use
small diameter exploratory holes to detect presence of reinforcing steel prior to drilling holes
for grouting.
4. Core drilling equipment, and electric impact hammers or other tools which do not provide for
immediate expulsion of the drill cuttings shall not be used.
EPOXY RELATED WORK Section 03 21 16 - 6
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
5. Unless noted otherwise on the drawings, depth of hole used for embedding the bolts, bars or
dowels shall be at least fifteen times their diameter.
6. Unless noted otherwise on the drawings, the center to center distance between the embedded
bolts, bars or dowels shall be at least twelve times their diameter.
7. Unless noted otherwise on the drawings, the edge distance shall be at least six times the
diameter of the bolt, bar or dowel.
8. Hole diameter shall normally be 1/4" larger than the outside diameter of the embedded item.
In no case shall the hole diameter be 3/8" larger than the diameter of the embedded item.
D. Epoxy Application
1. Condition epoxy compound materials at a temperature between 65°-80°F unless otherwise
recommended by the manufacturer. Epoxies beyond this range of temperature shall not be
used.
2. Mix epoxy materials in a clean container free of contaminants.
3. Thoroughly blend epoxy components with mechanical mixers to a uniform and homogenous
mixture. Mix small batches (up to 1 quart) by use of spatulas, palette knives, or similar
devices. Take care to use proper proportions of the epoxy components when using small
batches.
4. Mixing shall be accomplished well within the pot life of the epoxy after allowing for time
required for application.
5. Partially fill the hole with epoxy. Then insert the bolt, dowel or reinforcing bar into the hole
such that the resin material oozes out around the embedded item, ensuring complete contact.
Twist the bolt, dowel or bar slightly as it is inserted in the hole to ensure complete contact.
6. As an alternative to inserting the embedded item after the epoxy is poured in the hole, the
bolt, dowel, or bar may be positioned in the hole and filled up with epoxy by hand caulking
guns or injected with in-head mixing equipment. In either case, the nozzle shall be provided
with a hose or tube of sufficient length to reach the bottom of the hole being filled.
7. Where the holes are horizontal or overhead, the opening shall be covered by a masking or a
duct tape. Make a split in the tape and insert the epoxy injection tube through the split. Fill
hole completely with epoxy and then insert the embedded item through the split tape. Amount
of epoxy should be such that a small amount of material oozes through the split. Twist the
bolt, dowel or bar slightly as it is inserted in the hole to ensure complete contact.
8. Do not apply epoxy in the rain or in the presence of standing water.
E. Cleanup
1. Protect surfaces surrounding the work area against spillage.
2. Epoxy oozed out from the holes and spillages shall be cleaned before they become difficult to
remove.
3. Cleanup whatever portions of the existing structure are soiled or stained in the process of
grouting the bolts, dowels, or reinforcing bars.
END OF SECTION
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Section 03 30 00 - 1
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
SECTION 03 30 00 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Concrete formwork.
B. Concrete building frame members.
C. Concrete reinforcement.
D. Joint devices associated with concrete work.
E. Miscellaneous concrete elements, including equipment pads, equipment pits, light pole bases, flagpole
bases, thrust blocks, and manholes.
F. Concrete curing.
1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 03 10 00 - Concrete Forming and Accessories: Forms and accessories for formwork.
B. Section 03 20 00 - Concrete Reinforcing.
C. Section 03 35 11 - Concrete Floor Finishes: Densifiers, hardeners, applied coatings, and polishing.
D. Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealants: Products and installation for sealants and joint fillers for saw cut
joints and isolation joints in slabs.
E. Section 07 95 13 - Expansion Joint Cover Assemblies.
1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete; 2016.
B. ACI 302.1R - Guide to Concrete Floor and Slab Construction; 2015.
C. ACI 304R - Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete; 2000 (Reapproved
2009).
D. ACI 305R - Guide to Hot Weather Concreting; 2010.
E. ACI 306R - Guide to Cold Weather Concreting; 2016.
F. ACI 308R - Guide to External Curing of Concrete; 2016.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Section 03 30 00 - 2
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturers' data on manufactured products showing compliance with
specified requirements and installation instructions for proprietary materials and items, including
admixtures, patching compounds, epoxies, grouts, waterstops, joint systems, curing compounds, dry-
shake finish materials, hardeners, sealers and others as requested by Architect/Engineer.
1. For curing compounds, provide data on method of removal in the event of incompatibility
with floor covering adhesives.
2. For chemical-resistant waterstops, provide data on ASTM D471 test results.
B. Mix Design: Submit proposed concrete mix design.
1. Indicate proposed mix design complies with requirements of ACI 301, Section 4 - Concrete
Mixtures.
2. Indicate proposed mix design complies with requirements of ACI 318, Chapter 5 - Concrete
Quality, Mixing and Placing.
3. Indicate proposed mix design complies with fiber reinforcing manufacturer's written
recommendations.
C. Samples
1. Samples for Pigment Color Selection: Submit manufacturer's complete sample chip set,
including pigment number and required dosage rate for each color.
2. Verification Samples: Submit sample chips of specified colors indicating pigment numbers
and required dosage rates, for subsequent comparison to installed concrete.
3. Samples: Submit samples of underslab vapor retarder to be used.
4. Samples: Submit two, 12 inch (305 mm) long samples of waterstops and construction joint
devices.
D. Laboratory Test Reports
1. Test Reports: Submit report for each test or series of tests specified.
E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: For concrete accessories, indicate installation procedures and
interface required with adjacent construction.
F. Project Record Documents: Accurately record actual locations of embedded utilities and components
that will be concealed from view upon completion of concrete work.
G. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's name and
registered with manufacturer.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform work of this section in accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 318.
B. Follow recommendations of ACI 305R when concreting during hot weather.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Section 03 30 00 - 3
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
C. Follow recommendations of ACI 306R when concreting during cold weather.
D. For slabs required to include moisture vapor reduction admixture (MVRA), do not proceed with
placement unless manufacturer's representative is present for every day of placement.
1.6 MOCK-UP
A. Construct and erect mock-up panel for architectural concrete surfaces indicated to receive special
treatment or finish as result of formwork.
B. Accepted mock-up panel is considered basis of quality for the finished work. Keep mock-up exposed
to view for duration of concrete work.
C. Mock-up may remain as part of the Work.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 FORMWORK
A. Formwork Design and Construction: Comply with guidelines of ACI 347R to provide formwork that
will produce concrete complying with tolerances of ACI 117.
2.2 REINFORCEMENT MATERIALS
A. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615/A615M, Grade 60 (60,000 psi) and Grade 40. See Drawings.
2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Cement: ASTM C150/C150M, Type I - Normal Portland type.
1. Acquire cement for entire project from same source.
B. Fine and Coarse Aggregates: ASTM C33/C33M.
1. Acquire aggregates for entire project from same source.
C. Lightweight Aggregate: ASTM C330/C330M.
D. Fly Ash: ASTM C618, Class C or F.
E. Calcined Pozzolan: ASTM C618, Class N.
F. Silica Fume: ASTM C1240, proportioned in accordance with ACI 211.1.
G. Water: ASTM C1602/C1602M; clean, potable, and not detrimental to concrete.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Section 03 30 00 - 4
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
2.4 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A. Underslab Vapor Retarder: Sheet material complying with ASTM E1745, Class A; stated by
manufacturer as suitable for installation in contact with soil or granular fill under concrete slabs. The
use of single ply polyethylene is prohibited.
1. Installation: Comply with ASTM E1643.
2. Accessory Products: Vapor retarder manufacturer's recommended tape, adhesive, mastic,
prefabricated boots, etc., for sealing seams and penetrations.
B. Non-Shrink Cementitious Grout: Premixed compound consisting of non-metallic aggregate, cement,
water reducing and plasticizing agents.
1. Grout: Comply with ASTM C1107/C1107M.
2. Height Change, Plastic State; when tested in accordance with ASTM C827/C827M:
a. Maximum: Plus 4 percent.
b. Minimum: Plus 1 percent.
3. Minimum Compressive Strength at 48 Hours, ASTM C109/C109M: 2,000 pounds per square
inch (13.7 MPa).
4. Minimum Compressive Strength at 48 Hours: 2,000 pounds per square inch (13.7 MPa).
5. Products containing aluminum powder are not permitted.
6. Low-Slump, Dry Pack Products:
C. Non-Shrink Epoxy Grout: Moisture-insensitive, two-part; consisting of epoxy resin, non-metallic
aggregate, and activator.
1. Composition: High solids content material exhibiting positive expansion when tested in
accordance with ASTM C827/C827M.
a. Maximum Height Change: Plus 4 percent.
b. Minimum Height Change: Plus 1 percent.
2. Minimum Compressive Strength at 7 days, ASTM C579: 12,000 pounds per square inch
(82.7 MPa).
D. Termite-Resistant Barrier Sealant: See Division 31 Specification Section 31 31 16 “Termite Control”.
E. Architectural Concrete Floor Topping and Resurfacer:
1. Minimum Compressive Strength at 28 Days, ASTM C109/C109M: 6,500 pounds per square
inch (45 MPa).
2.5 BONDING AND JOINTING PRODUCTS
A. Latex Bonding Agent: Non-redispersable acrylic latex, complying with ASTM C1059/C1059M, Type
II.
B. Epoxy Bonding System:
1. Complying with ASTM C881/C881M and of Type required for specific application.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Section 03 30 00 - 5
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
C. Acetate Bonding Agent: Non-redispersable polyvinyl acetate.
D. Silane Hybrid Anchoring System:
1. Complying with ASTM C881/C881M and of Type required for specific application.
E. Waterproofing Admixture Slurry: Slurry coat of Portland cement, sand, and crystalline waterproofing
additive, mixed with water in proportions recommended by manufacturer to achieve waterproofing at
cold joints in concrete.
F. Reglets: Formed steel sheet, galvanized, with temporary filler to prevent concrete intrusion during
placement.
G. Slab Isolation Joint Filler: 1/2 inch (13 mm) thick, height equal to slab thickness, with removable top
section that will form 1/2 inch (13 mm) deep sealant pocket after removal.
2.6 CURING MATERIALS
A. Evaporation Reducer: Liquid thin-film-forming compound that reduces rapid moisture loss caused by
high temperature, low humidity, and high winds; intended for application immediately after concrete
placement.
B. Curing Compound, Naturally Dissipating: Clear, water-based, liquid membrane-forming compound;
complying with ASTM C309.
C. Curing Agent, Water Replacement Type: Clear, water based, liquid water cure replacement agent
complying with ASTM C309 standards for water retention, and with ACI 302.1R.
D. Curing and Anti-Spalling Compound: Boiled linseed oil compound.
E. Wax Curing Compound: Water-based liquid, white pigmented, membrane-forming.
F. Resin Curing Compound: Solvent-based liquid, white pigmented, membrane-forming.
1. For use on exterior slabs. When slab will be painted, sealed, topped, or receive other applied
finish, completely remove curing compound after curing is complete and before finish
coatings are applied.
G. Curing and Sealing Compound, Moisture Emission Reducing: Liquid, membrane-forming, clear
sealer, for application to newly placed concrete; capable of providing adequate bond for flooring
adhesives, initially and over the long term; with sufficient moisture vapor impermeability to prevent
deterioration of flooring adhesives due to moisture emission.
1. Use this product to cure and seal all slabs to receive adhesively applied flooring or roofing.
2. Comply with ASTM C309 and ASTM C1315 Type I Class A.
3. VOC Content: Less than 100 g/L.
4. Solids Content: 25 percent, minimum.
H. Curing Compound, Non-dissipating: Liquid, membrane-forming, clear, non-yellowing acrylic;
complying with ASTM C309.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Section 03 30 00 - 6
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
I. Curing and Sealing Compound, Low Gloss: Liquid, membrane-forming, clear, non-yellowing acrylic;
complying with ASTM C1315 Type 1 Class A.
J. Curing and Sealing Compound, High Gloss: Liquid, membrane-forming, clear, non-yellowing acrylic;
complying with ASTM C1315 Type 1 Class A.
K. Moisture-Retaining Sheet: ASTM C171.
L. Polyethylene Film: ASTM D2103, 4 mil, 0.004 inch (0.102 mm) thick, clear.
M. Water: Potable, not detrimental to concrete.
2.8 CONCRETE MIX DESIGN
A. Proportioning Normal Weight Concrete: Comply with ACI 211.1 recommendations.
B. Proportioning Structural Lightweight Concrete: Comply with ACI 211.2 recommendations.
C. Concrete Strength: Establish required average strength for each type of concrete on the basis of field
experience or trial mixtures, as specified in ACI 301.
1. For trial mixtures method, employ independent testing agency acceptable to Architect for
preparing and reporting proposed mix designs.
D. Admixtures: Add acceptable admixtures as recommended in ACI 211.1 and at rates recommended or
required by manufacturer.
E. Normal Weight Concrete:
1. Water-Cement Ratio: Maximum 40 percent by weight.
2. Maximum Aggregate Size: 5/8 inch (16 mm).
2.9 MIXING
A. On Project Site: Mix in drum type batch mixer, complying with ASTM C685/C685M. Mix each
batch not less than 1-1/2 minutes and not more than 5 minutes.
1. Colored Concrete: Add pigments in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions to
achieve consistent color from batch to batch.
2. Fiber Reinforcement: Batch and mix as recommended by manufacturer for specific project
conditions.
B. Transit Mixers: Comply with ASTM C94/C94M.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Section 03 30 00 - 7
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify lines, levels, and dimensions before proceeding with work of this section.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Verify that forms are clean and free of rust before applying release agent.
B. Coordinate placement of embedded items with erection of concrete formwork and placement of form
accessories.
C. Where new concrete is to be bonded to previously placed concrete, prepare existing surface by
cleaning and applying bonding agent in according to bonding agent manufacturer's instructions.
1. Use epoxy bonding system for bonding to damp surfaces, for structural load-bearing
applications, and where curing under humid conditions is required.
2. Use latex bonding agent only for non-load-bearing applications.
D. Where new concrete with integral waterproofing is to be bonded to previously placed concrete, prepare
surfaces to be treated in accordance with waterproofing manufacturer's instructions. Saturate cold joint
surface with clean water, and remove excess water before application of coat of waterproofing
admixture slurry. Apply slurry coat uniformly with semi-stiff bristle brush at rate recommended by
waterproofing manufacturer.
E. In locations where new concrete is doweled to existing work, drill holes in existing concrete, insert
steel dowels and pack solid with non-shrink grout.
F. Interior Slabs on Grade: Install vapor retarder under interior slabs on grade. Lap joints minimum 6
inches (150 mm). Seal joints, seams and penetrations watertight with manufacturer's recommended
products and follow manufacturer's written instructions. Repair damaged vapor retarder before
covering.
3.3 PLACING CONCRETE
A. Place concrete in accordance with ACI 304R.
B. Notify Architect not less than 24 hours prior to commencement of placement operations.
C. Maintain records of concrete placement. Record date, location, quantity, air temperature, and test
samples taken.
D. Ensure reinforcement, inserts, waterstops, embedded parts, and formed construction joint devices will
not be disturbed during concrete placement.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Section 03 30 00 - 8
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
E. Place concrete continuously without construction (cold) joints wherever possible; where construction
joints are necessary, before next placement prepare joint surface by removing laitance and exposing the
sand and sound surface mortar, by sandblasting or high-pressure water jetting.
3.4 SLAB JOINTING
A. Locate joints as indicated on the drawings.
B. Anchor joint fillers and devices to prevent movement during concrete placement.
C. Isolation Joints: Use preformed joint filler with removable top section for joint sealant, total height
equal to thickness of slab, set flush with top of slab.
3.5 FLOOR FLATNESS AND LEVELNESS TOLERANCES
A. An independent testing agency, as specified in Section 01 40 00, will inspect finished slabs for
compliance with specified tolerances.
B. Maximum Variation of Surface Flatness:
1. Exposed Concrete Floors: 1/4 inch (6 mm) in 10 feet (3 m).
2. Under Seamless Resilient Flooring: 1/4 inch (6 mm) in 10 feet (3 m).
3. Under Carpeting: 1/4 inch (6 mm) in 10 feet (3 m).
C. Correct the slab surface if tolerances are less than specified.
D. Correct defects by grinding or by removal and replacement of the defective work. Areas requiring
corrective work will be identified. Re-measure corrected areas by the same process.
3.6 CONCRETE FINISHING
A. Repair surface defects, including tie holes, immediately after removing formwork.
B. Unexposed Form Finish: Rub down or chip off fins or other raised areas 1/4 inch (6 mm) or more in
height.
C. Exposed Form Finish: Rub down or chip off and smooth fins or other raised areas 1/4 inch (6 mm) or
more in height. Provide finish as follows:
1. Smooth Rubbed Finish: Wet concrete and rub with carborundum brick or other abrasive, not
more than 24 hours after form removal.
2. Grout Cleaned Finish: Wet areas to be cleaned and apply grout mixture by brush or spray;
scrub immediately to remove excess grout. After drying, rub vigorously with clean burlap,
and keep moist for 36 hours.
D. Concrete Slabs: Finish to requirements of ACI 302.1R, and as follows:
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Section 03 30 00 - 9
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
1. Surfaces to Receive Thick Floor Coverings: "Wood float" as described in ACI 302.1R; thick
floor coverings include quarry tile, ceramic tile, and Portland cement terrazzo with full bed
setting system.
2. Decorative Exposed Surfaces: Trowel as described in ACI 302.1R; use steel-reinforced
plastic trowel blades instead of steel blades to avoid black-burnish marks; decorative exposed
surfaces include surfaces to be stained or dyed, pigmented concrete, surfaces to receive liquid
hardeners, surfaces to receive dry-shake hardeners, surfaces to be polished, and all other
exposed slab surfaces.
E. In areas with floor drains, maintain floor elevation at walls; pitch surfaces uniformly to drains at 1:100
nominal.
F. Concrete Polishing: See Section 03 35 11.
3.7 CURING AND PROTECTION
A. Comply with requirements of ACI 308R. Immediately after placement, protect concrete from
premature drying, excessively hot or cold temperatures, and mechanical injury.
B. Maintain concrete with minimal moisture loss at relatively constant temperature for period necessary
for hydration of cement and hardening of concrete.
C. Formed Surfaces: Cure by moist curing with forms in place for full curing period.
D. Surfaces Not in Contact with Forms:
1. Initial Curing: Start as soon as free water has disappeared and before surface is dry. Keep
continuously moist for not less than three days by water ponding, water-saturated sand, water-
fog spray, or saturated burlap.
2. Final Curing: Begin after initial curing but before surface is dry.
3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. An independent testing agency will perform field quality control tests, as specified in Section 01 40 00
- Quality Requirements.
B. Provide free access to concrete operations at project site and cooperate with appointed firm.
C. Take one additional test cylinder during cold weather concreting, cured on job site under same
conditions as concrete it represents.
D. Slab Testing: Cooperate with manufacturer of specified moisture vapor reduction admixture (MVRA)
to allow access for sampling and testing concrete for compliance with warranty requirements.
3.9 DEFECTIVE CONCRETE
A. Test Results: The testing agency shall report test results in writing to Architect and Contractor within
24 hours of test.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Section 03 30 00 - 10
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
B. Defective Concrete: Concrete not complying with required lines, details, dimensions, tolerances or
specified requirements.
C. Repair or replacement of defective concrete will be determined by the Architect. The cost of
additional testing shall be borne by Contractor when defective concrete is identified.
D. Do not patch, fill, touch-up, repair, or replace exposed concrete except upon express direction of
Architect for each individual area.
3.10 PROTECTION
A. Do not permit traffic over unprotected concrete floor surface until fully cured.
3.11 SCHEDULE - CONCRETE TYPES AND FINISHES
A. Foundation Walls: 3,000 pounds per square inch (20.7 MPa) 28 day concrete, form finish with
honeycomb filled surface.
B. Underside of Supported Floors and Structure Exposed to View: 4,000 pounds per square inch (27.6
MPa) 28 day concrete, form finish with honeycomb filled surface.
END OF SECTION
CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHING Section 03 35 00 - 1
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
SECTION 03 35 00 – CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHING
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Finishing scheduled rooms to receive stained and sealed concrete floor finish. See Room Finish
Schedule.
B. Surface treatment with dust proofing sealer.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 03 30 00 – “Cast-in-Place Concrete” for finishing of concrete surface to tolerance; floating,
troweling, and similar operations; curing.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. ACI 301 – Structural Concrete for Buildings
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300 “Submittals”.
B. Product Data: Provide data on finishing compounds, product characteristics, compatibility and
limitations.
C. Manufacturer’s Installation Instructions: Indicate criteria for preparation and application.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products under provisions of Section 01600 “Materials and
Equipment”.
B. Deliver materials in manufacturer’s packaging, including application instructions.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Concrete Stain: Lithochrome Chemstain as manufactured by L.M. Scofield Company.
B. Floor Sealers: See Room Finish Schedule.
CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHING Section 03 35 00 - 2
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
1. Euclid – Super Diamond Clear
2. Euclid – Everclear
3. Euclid – Diamond Hard
C. Additives: HC SharkGrip – Slip resistant additive for designated floor sealer top coat.
D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600 “Materials and Equipment”.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify site conditions under Section 01400 “Quality Control”
B. Verify that floor surfaces are acceptable to receive the Work of this Section.
3.2 FLOOR FINISHING
A. Finish concrete floor surfaces in accordance with ACI 301.
B. Steel trowel surfaces which will receive carpeting, resilient flooring, seamless flooring and thin set
ceramic tile.
C. Steel trowel surfaces which are scheduled to be exposed.
D. In areas with floor drains, maintain floor elevation at wall; pitch surfaces uniformly to drains at ⅛-inch
per foot.
3.3 STAINED AND SEALED FLOOR SURFACE TREATMENT INSTALLATION
(Floors scheduled as stained concrete)
A. Fill all holes, crevices, spaces and disintegrated areas.
B. Allow concrete to cure for 28-days. Wet cure. Do not install curing compound.
C. Clean all dirt, grit, dust or oil from surface.
D. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendation.
E. Apply two (2) coats of concrete stain. Apply in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendation.
F. Apply one (1) or two (2) coats as scheduled of floor sealer. Mix and apply in accordance with the
manufacturer’s recommendation.
CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHING Section 03 35 00 - 3
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
3.4 CONCRETE SEALER, FLOOR SURFACE TREATMENT INSTALLATION
(Floors scheduled as sealed concrete)
A. Fill all holes, cervices, spaces and disintegrated areas.
B. Allow concrete to cure for 28-days.
C. Clean all dirt, grit, dust or oil from surface.
D. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surface in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendation.
E. Apply one (1) or two (2) coats of sealer as scheduled. Mix and apply in accordance with the
manufacturer’s recommendation.
3.5 SCHEDULE OF FLOOR FINISH TYPES
A. Sealed Concrete Floors / Patios
1. TYPE 1: Restrooms/Concessions:
a. Sealed with one (1) coat of Euclid Diamond Hard
2. TYPE 2: Interior Service Areas and Stained Concrete Floors
a. Sealed with two (2) coats of Euclid Diamond clear (semi-gloss)
REINFORCED CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS Section 04 29 00 - 1
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
SECTION 04 29 00 – REINFORCED CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Concrete Block.
B. Mortar and Grout.
C. Reinforcement and Anchorage.
D. Flashings.
E. Lintels.
F. Accessories.
1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. TMS 402/602 - Building Code Requirements and Specification for Masonry Structures; 2016.
B. ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware;
2016a.
C. ASTM A615/A615M - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars for Concrete
Reinforcement; 2016.
D. ASTM A641/A641M - Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire; 2009a
(Reapproved 2014).
E. ASTM A1064/A1064M - Standard Specification for Carbon-Steel Wire and Welded Wire
Reinforcement, Plain and Deformed, for Concrete; 2017.
F. ASTM C140/C140M - Standard Test Methods of Sampling and Testing Concrete Masonry Units and
Related Units; 2017a.
G. ASTM C150/C150M - Standard Specification for Portland Cement; 2018.
H. ASTM C207 - Standard Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes; 2006 (Reapproved
2011).
I. ASTM C404 - Standard Specification for Aggregates for Masonry Grout; 2011.
J. ASTM C780 - Standard Test Method for Preconstruction and Construction Evaluation of Mortars for
Plain and Reinforced Unit Masonry; 2017.
K. UL (FRD) - Fire Resistance Directory; Current Edition.
REINFORCED CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS Section 04 29 00 - 2
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide data for masonry units, fabricated wire reinforcement, and mortar and grout.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate bar sizes, spacings, reinforcement quantities, bending and cutting schedules,
reinforcement supporting and spacing devices, and accessories.
C. Design Data: Indicate required mortar strength, unit assembly strength in each plane, and supporting
test data.
D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that masonry units meet or exceed specified requirements.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with provisions of TMS 402/602, except where exceeded by requirements of the contract
documents.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, handle, and store masonry units by means that will prevent mechanical damage and
contamination by other materials.
B. Handle and store ceramic glazed masonry units in protective cartons or trays. Do not remove from
protective packaging until ready for installation.
C. FIELD CONDITIONS
D. Cold and Hot Weather Requirements: Comply with requirements of TMS 402/602 or applicable
building code, whichever is more stringent.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 UNIT MASONRY - GENERAL
A. Comply with applicable codes for all components.
2.2 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
A. Concrete Block: Comply with referenced standards and as follows:
1. Size: Standard units with nominal face dimensions of 16 by 8 inches (400 by 200 mm) and
nominal depth of 8 inches (200 mm), 10 inches or 12 inches.
2. Special Shapes: Provide non-standard blocks configured for corners.
REINFORCED CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS Section 04 29 00 - 3
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
2.3 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS
A. Mortar:
1. Portland Cement: ASTM C150/C150M, Type I.
a. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207, Type S.
B. Grout:
1. Comply with ASTM C476 for grout.
a. Compressive strength of 3000 PSI at age 28 days.
2.4 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE
A. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615/A615M, Grade 60 (60,000 psi) (420 MPa) yield strength.
1. Plain billet-steel bars.
2. Unfinished.
B. Joint Reinforcement: Use ladder type joint reinforcement where vertical reinforcement is involved and
truss type elsewhere, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Joint Reinforcement: type; ASTM A1064/A1064M steel wire, mill galvanized to ASTM
A641/A641M, Class 3; side rods as detailed in the Drawing; width as required. Provide not less than 1
½-inch of mortar coverage on each exposure.
D. Strap Anchors: Bent steel shapes configured as required for specific situations in masonry joint. Hot-
dip galvanized to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B.
E. Ties: Formed steel wire, ⅛-inch thick, adjustable, eye and pintle type, hot-dip galvanized to ASTM A
153/A 153M, Class B.
2.5 ACCESSORIES
A. Preformed Control Joints: Polyvinyl chloride material. Provide with corner and tee accessories, fused
joints.
B. Cleaning Solution: Non-acidic, not harmful to masonry work or adjacent materials.
2.6 LINTELS
A. Install steel lintels where indicted. H.D.G.
REINFORCED CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS Section 04 29 00 - 4
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
2.7 GROUT MIXING
A. Provide grout with a sump of 8- to 11-inches as measured according to ASTM C143.
2.8 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING
A. Testing will be conducted by an independent test agency, in accordance with provisions of Section
01400 - Quality Control.
B. Concrete Masonry: Test each type, class, and grade of concrete masonry unit in accordance with
ASTM C140/C140M for compliance with requirements of this specification.
C. Mortar Mixes: Test mortars prebatched by weight in accordance with ASTM C780 recommendations
for preconstruction testing.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive masonry.
B. Verify that related items provided under other sections are properly sized and located.
C. Verify that built-in items are in proper location, and ready for roughing into masonry work.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Direct and coordinate placement of metal anchors supplied for installation under other sections.
B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust.
3.3 COURSING
A. Establish lines, levels, and coursing indicated. Protect from displacement.
B. Maintain masonry courses to uniform dimension. Form vertical and horizontal joints of uniform
thickness.
C. Concrete Masonry Units:
1. Bond: One-half running bond
2. Coursing: One unit and one mortar joint to equal ⅜-inches
3. Mortar Joints
REINFORCED CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS Section 04 29 00 - 5
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
3.4 PLACING AND BONDING
A. Lay solid masonry units in full bed of mortar, with full head joints, uniformly jointed with other work.
B. Remove excess mortar as work progresses.
C. Interlock intersections and external corners.
D. Perform job site cutting of masonry units with proper tools to provide straight, clean, unchipped edges.
Prevent broken masonry unit corners or edges.
3.5 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE
A. Joint Reinforcement: Install horizontal joint reinforcement 16-inches on center.
1. Place continuous joint reinforcement in first and second joint below top of walls.
B. Anchors: Fasten anchors to structural framing and embed in masonry joints as masonry is laid. Unless
otherwise indicated on drawings or closer spacing is indicated under specific wall type, space anchors
at maximum of 12-inches (900 mm) horizontally and 16-inches (600 mm) vertically.
C. Wall Ties: Install wall ties at locations indicated, spaced at not more than 12-inches (610 mm) on
center horizontally and 16 inches (406 mm) on center vertically, unless otherwise indicated on
drawings.
3.6 MASONRY FLASHINGS
A. Whether or not specifically indicated, install masonry flashing to divert water to exterior at all
locations where downward flow of water will be interrupted.
3.7 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS
A. Do not continue horizontal joint reinforcement through control or expansion joints.
B. Install preformed control joint device in continuous lengths. Seal butt and corner joints in accordance
with manufacturer's instructions.
C. Size control joints as indicated on drawings; if not indicated, ⅜-inch (9.4 mm) wide and deep.
3.8 BUILT-IN WORK
A. As work progresses, install built-in weld plates and other items to be built into the work and furnished
under other sections.
B. Install built-in items plumb, level, and true to line.
REINFORCED CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS Section 04 29 00 - 6
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
C. Bed anchors of metal door frames in adjacent mortar joints. Fill frame voids solid with grout.
3.10 TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation from Level Coursing: ⅛ inch in 10-feet.
B. Maximum Variation of Joint Thickness: ⅛ inch in 3 ft.
3.11 CLEANING
A. Remove excess mortar and mortar smears as work progresses.
B. Replace defective mortar. Match adjacent work.
C. Clean soiled surfaces with cleaning solution.
D. Use non-metallic tools in cleaning operations.
3.12 PROTECTION
A. Without damaging completed work, provide protective boards at exposed external corners that are
subject to damage by construction activities.
END OF SECTION
UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES Section 04 81 00 - 1
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
SECTION 04 81 00 - UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes unit masonry assemblies consisting of the following:
1. Concrete masonry units (light-weight).
2. Face brick.
3. Grout.
4. Masonry Joint Reinforcement.
5. Ties and anchors.
6. Embedded flashing.
7. Miscellaneous masonry accessories.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 08 Section “Aluminum Windows”.
2. Division 07 Section "Fluid-Applied Weather Barrier" for liquid air barriers applied to cavity
face of backup wythes of cavity walls.
3. Division 07 Section "Water Repellents" for water repellents applied to unit masonry
assemblies.
4. Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for exposed sheet metal flashing.
5. Division 10 Section "Louvers and Vents" for wall vents.
C. Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section include the following:
1. Anchor sections of adjustable masonry anchors for connecting to structural frame, installed
under Division 05 Section "Structural Steel."
D. Products installed, but not furnished, under this Section include the following:
1. Steel lintels for unit masonry, furnished under Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications."
2. Manufactured reglets in masonry joints for metal flashing, furnished under Division 07
Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."
3. Aluminum door, window and storefront frames in unit masonry openings, furnished under
Division 08.
E. Allowances: Furnish the following under the allowances indicated, as specified in Division 01
Section "Allowances":
1. Source and field quality-control testing under Inspection and Testing Allowance.
UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES Section 04 81 00 - 2
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide unit masonry that develops the following net-area compressive strengths (f'm) at 28 days.
Determine compressive strength of masonry by testing masonry prisms according to ASTM C 1314.
1. For Concrete Unit Masonry: f'm = 2500 psi.
2. For Brick Unit Masonry: f'm = 2500 psi.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each different masonry unit, accessory, and other manufactured product specified.
B. Samples for Initial Selection: For the following:
1. Unit masonry Samples in small-scale form showing the full range of colors and textures
available for each different exposed masonry unit required.
2. Colored mortar Samples showing the full range of colors available.
C. Samples for Verification: For the following:
1. Full-size units for each different exposed masonry unit required, showing the full range of
exposed colors, textures, and dimensions to be expected in the completed construction.
2. Colored mortar Samples for each color required, showing the full range of colors expected in
the finished construction. Make samples using the same sand and mortar ingredients to be
used on Project.
3. Weep holes/vents in color to match mortar color.
4. Accessories embedded in the masonry.
D. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article.
E. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results of the
following for compliance with requirements indicated:
1. Each type of masonry unit required.
a. Include size-variation data for brick, verifying that actual range of sizes falls within
specified tolerances.
b. Include test results, measurements, and calculations establishing net-area compressive
strength of masonry units.
2. Mortar complying with property requirements of ASTM C 270.
3. Grout mixes complying with compressive strength requirements of ASTM C 476. Include
description of type and proportions of grout ingredients.
F. Material Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that each of the following items complies
with requirements:
1. Each type of masonry unit required.
a. Include size-variation data for brick, verifying that actual range of sizes falls within
specified tolerances.
b. Include test data, measurements, and calculations establishing net-area compressive
UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES Section 04 81 00 - 3
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
strength of masonry units.
G. Cold-Weather Procedures: Detailed description of methods, materials, and equipment to be used to
comply with cold-weather requirements.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of a uniform texture and
color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, through one source
from a single manufacturer for each product required.
B. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality, including
color for exposed masonry, from one manufacturer for each cementitious component and from one
source or producer for each aggregate.
C. Preconstruction Testing Service: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing agency to
perform preconstruction testing indicated below. Payment for these services will be made from the
Inspection and Testing Allowance, as authorized by Change Orders. Retesting of materials failing to
meet specified requirements shall be done at Contractor's expense.
1. Clay Masonry Unit Test: For each clay masonry unit indicated, per ASTM C 67.
2. Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each concrete masonry unit indicated, per ASTM C 140.
3. Mortar Test: For mortar properties per ASTM C 270.
4. Grout Test: For compressive strength per ASTM C 1019. Delete subparagraph below if
mortar is specified to comply with proportion specification.
D. Sample Panels: Before installing unit masonry, build sample panels, using materials indicated for the
completed Work, to verify selections made under sample Submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic
effects. Build sample panels for each type of exposed unit masonry assembly in sizes approximately
48-inches long by 48 -inches high by full thickness.
1. Locate panels in the locations indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect.
2. Clean exposed faces of panels with masonry cleaner indicated.
3. Protect approved sample panels from the elements with weather-resistant membrane.
4. Maintain sample panels during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for
judging the completed Work.
5. Approval of sample panels is for color, texture, and blending of masonry units; relationship of
mortar and sealant colors to masonry unit colors; tooling of joints; aesthetic qualities of
workmanship; and other material and construction qualities specifically approved by
Architect in writing.
a. Approval of sample panels does not constitute approval of deviations from the
Contract Documents contained in sample panels, unless such deviations are
specifically approved by Architect in writing.
6. Demolish and remove sample panels when directed.
E. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in
Division 01 Section "Project Meetings."
UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES Section 04 81 00 - 4
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store masonry units on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not stored in an enclosed
location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, securely tied. If units become wet,
do not install until they are dry.
1. Protect Type I concrete masonry units from moisture absorption so that, at the time of
installation, the moisture content is not more than the maximum allowed at the time of
delivery.
B. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not use
cementitious materials that have become damp.
C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained, and
contamination avoided.
D. Deliver preblended, dry mortar mix in moisture-resistant containers designed for lifting and
emptying into dispensing silo. Store preblended, dry mortar mix in delivery containers on elevated
platforms, under cover, and in a dry location or in a metal dispensing silo with weatherproof cover.
E. Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt and
oil.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Protection of Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with
waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry when
construction is not in progress.
1. Extend cover a minimum of 24-inches down both sides and hold cover securely in place.
2. Where one wythe of multiwythe masonry walls is completed in advance of other wythes,
secure cover a minimum of 24-inches down face next to unconstructed wythe and hold cover
in place.
B. Do not apply concentrated loads for at least 3 days after building masonry walls or columns.
C. Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left
exposed or painted. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with such
masonry.
1. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and from mortar splatter by coverings spread on
ground and over wall surface.
2. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings.
3. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted and
integral finishes, from mortar droppings.
4. Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at the end of each day to prevent rain from
splashing mortar and dirt onto completed masonry.
UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES Section 04 81 00 - 5
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
D. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or
frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost or by
freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained in
ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.
1. Cold-Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 40 deg F
and above and will remain so until masonry has dried, but not less than 7 days after
completing cleaning.
E. Hot-Weather Requirements: Protect unit masonry work when temperature and humidity conditions
produce excessive evaporation of water from mortar and grout. Provide artificial shade and wind
breaks and use cooled materials as required.
1. When ambient temperature exceeds 100 deg F, or 90 deg F with a wind velocity greater than
8 mph, do not spread mortar beds more than 48-inches ahead of masonry. Set masonry units
within one minute of spreading mortar.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
A. General: Provide shapes indicated and as follows:
1. Provide special shapes for lintels, corners, jambs, sash, control joints, headers, bonding, and
other special conditions.
2. Provide bullnose units for outside corners, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Concrete Masonry Units: ASTM C 90 and as follows:
1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area compressive
strength of 2500 psi.
2. Weight Classification: Light weight.
3. Provide Type I, moisture-controlled units.
4. Size (Width): Manufactured to the following dimensions:
a. 4-inches nominal; 3 ⅝-inches actual.
b. 6-inches nominal; 5 ⅝-inches actual.
c. 8-inches nominal; 7 ⅝-inches actual.
d. 10-inches nominal; 9 ⅝-inches actual.
e. 12-inches nominal; 11 ⅝-inches actual.
5. Exposed Faces: Manufacturer's standard color and texture, unless otherwise indicated.
a. Where units are to receive a direct application of plaster, provide textured-face units
made with gap-graded aggregates.
b. Where units are to be left exposed, provide color and texture matching the range
represented by Architect's sample.
2.2 BRICK
A. General: Provide shapes indicated and as follows for each form of brick required:
UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES Section 04 81 00 - 6
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
1. Provide units without cores or frogs and with exposed surfaces finished for ends of sills and
caps and for similar applications that would otherwise expose unfinished brick surfaces.
B. Provide special shapes for applications requiring brick of size, form, color, and texture on exposed
surfaces that cannot be produced by sawing.
1. Provide special shapes for applications where stretcher units cannot accommodate special
conditions, including those at corners, movement joints, bond beams, sashes, and lintels.
2. Provide special shapes for applications where shapes produced by sawing would result in
sawed surfaces being exposed to view.
C. Face Brick: ASTM C 216, Grade MW or SW, Type FBS, and as follows:
1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area compressive
strength of 3000 psi.
2. Initial Rate of Absorption: Less than 20 g/30 sq. in. per minute when tested per ASTM C 67.
3. Efflorescence: Provide brick that has been tested according to ASTM C 67 and is rated “not
effloresced.”
4. Surface Coloring: Brick with surface coloring, other than flashed or sand-finished brick, shall
withstand 50 cycles of freezing and thawing per ASTM C 67 with no observable difference in
the applied finish when viewed from 10 feet.
5. Size: Manufactured to the following actual dimensions:
a. Modular Size: 3 ⅝-inches Wide x 2 ⅜-inches High x 7 ⅝-inches Long
6. Application: Use where brick is exposed, unless otherwise indicated.
7. Color and Texture: Match Architect’s samples.
8. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be in
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
9. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Brick as specified in Section 3.18.
2.3 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for cold-weather
construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar color indicated.
B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.
C. Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement complying with ASTM C 150,
Type I or Type III, and hydrated lime complying with ASTM C 207.
D. Mortar Cement: ASTM C 1329.
E. Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91.
1. For pigmented mortar, use a colored cement formulation as required to produce a mortar color
which will compliment a red-brown brick. Color as selected by Architect.
a. Pigments shall not exceed 10 percent of portland cement by weight for mineral
oxides nor 2 percent for carbon black.
b. Pigments shall not exceed 5 percent of masonry cement by weight for mineral oxides
UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES Section 04 81 00 - 7
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
nor 1 percent for carbon black.
2. For colored-aggregate mortar, use natural color or white cement as necessary to produce
required mortar color.
F. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144; except for joints less than ¼-inch thick, use aggregate graded
with 100 percent passing the No. 16 sieve.
1. White-Mortar Aggregates: Natural white sand or ground white stone.
2. Colored-Mortar Aggregates: Natural-colored sand or ground marble, granite, or other sound
stone; of color necessary to produce required mortar color.
G. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404.
H. Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides, compounded for use in
mortar mixes. Use only pigments with a record of satisfactory performance in masonry mortar.
I. Cold-Weather Admixture: Nonchloride, noncorrosive, accelerating admixture complying with
ASTM C 494, Type C, and recommended by the manufacturer for use in masonry mortar of
composition indicated.
J. Water-Repellent Admixture: Liquid water-repellent mortar admixture intended for use with concrete
masonry units, containing integral water repellent by same manufacturer.
K. Water: Potable.
L. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated
into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
M. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
1. Colored Portland Cement-Lime Mix:
a. Eaglebond; Blue Circle Cement.
b. Color Mortar Blend; Glen-Gery Corporation.
c. Rainbow Mortamix Custom Color Cement/Lime; Holnam, Inc.
d. Centurion Colorbond PL; Lafarge Corporation.
e. Lehigh Custom Color Portland/Lime; Lehigh Portland Cement Co.
f. Riverton Portland Cement Lime Custom Color; Riverton Corporation (The).
2. Mortar Cement:
a. Magnolia Superbond Mortar Cement; Blue Circle Cement.
b. Lafarge Mortar Cement; Lafarge Corporation.
3. Colored Mortar Cement:
a. Magnolia Superbond Mortar Cement; Blue Circle Cement.
4. Colored Masonry Cement:
a. Magnolia Masonry Cement; Blue Circle Cement.
b. Brixment-in-Color; Essroc Materials, Inc.
c. Rainbow Mortamix Custom Color Masonry Cement; Holnam, Inc.
d. Centurion Colorbond; Lafarge Corporation.
e. Lehigh Custom Color Masonry Cement; Lehigh Portland Cement Co.
f. Coosa Masonry Cement; National Cement Company, Inc.
g. Flamingo Color Masonry Cement; Riverton Corporation (The).
h. Richcolor Masonry Cement; Southdown, Inc.
UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES Section 04 81 00 - 8
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
5. Mortar Pigments:
a. True Tone Mortar Colors; Davis Colors.
b. Centurion Pigments; Lafarge Corporation.
c. SGS Mortar Colors; Solomon Grind-Chem Services, Inc.
6. Cold-Weather Admixture:
a. Accelguard 80; Euclid Chemical Co.
b. Morseled; W. R. Grace & Co., Construction Products Division.
c. Trimix-NCA; Sonneborn, Div. of ChemRex, Inc.
7. Water-Repellent Admixture:
a. Mortar Tite; Addiment Inc.
b. Dry-Block Mortar Admixture; W. R. Grace & Co., Construction Products Division.
c. Rheopel; Master Builders.
2.4 REINFORCING STEEL
A. Galvanized Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, including Supplement 1; or
ASTM A 617/A 617M, Grade 60.
2.5 MASONRY JOINT REINFORCEMENT
A. General: ASTM A 951 and as follows:
1. Hot-dip galvanized, carbon-steel wire for both interior and exterior walls.
2. Wire Size for Side Rods: W2.8 or 0.188-inch diameter.
3. Wire Size for Cross Rods: W2.8 or 0.188-inch diameter.
4. Provide in lengths of not less than 10 feet, with prefabricated corner and tee units where
indicated.
B. For single-wythe masonry, provide either ladder or truss type with single pair of side rods and cross
rods spaced not more than 16-inches o.c.
C. For multiwythe masonry, provide types as follows:
1. Ladder type with perpendicular cross rods spaced not more than 16-inches o.c. and 1 side rod
for each face shell of hollow masonry units more than 4-inches in width, plus 1 side rod for
each wythe of masonry 4-inches or less in width.
2. Tab type with single pair of side rods spaced for embedment within each face shell of backup
wythe and rectangular box-type cross ties spaced not more than 16-inches o.c. Size ties to
extend at least halfway through outer wythe but with at least 5/8-inch cover on outside face.
3. Adjustable (2-piece) type with single pair of side rods and cross ties spaced not more than 16-
inches o.c. and with separate adjustable veneer ties engaging the cross ties. Cross ties are
either U-shaped with eyes or rectangular. Space side rods for embedment within each face
shell of backup wythe and size adjustable ties to extend at least halfway through outer wythe
but with at least 5/8-inch cover on outside face.
a. Use where indicated and where horizontal joints of facing wythe do not align with
those of backup wythe.
b. Use where facing wythe is of different material than backup wythe.
UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES Section 04 81 00 - 9
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
2.6 TIES AND ANCHORS, GENERAL
A. General: Provide ties and anchors, specified in subsequent articles, made from materials that comply
with this Article, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Mill Galvanized Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82; with ASTM A 641, Class 1 coating.
C. Hot-Dip Galvanized Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82; with ASTM A 153, Class B-2 coating.
D. Stainless-Steel Wire: ASTM A 580/A 580M, Type 304 or 316.
E. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60, commercial-quality, steel sheet zinc coated by
hot-dip process on continuous lines before fabrication.
F. Steel Sheet, Galvanized after Fabrication: ASTM A 366/A 366M cold-rolled, carbon-steel sheet
hot-dip galvanized after fabrication to comply with ASTM A 153.
G. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304 or 316.
H. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
2.7 BENT WIRE TIES
A. General: Rectangular units with closed ends and not less than 4-inches wide. Z-shaped ties with
ends bent 90 degrees to provide hooks not less than 2-inches long may be used for masonry
constructed from solid units or hollow units laid with cells horizontal.
1. Where coursing between wythes does not align, use adjustable ties composed of 2 parts; 1
with pintles, the other with eyes; with maximum misalignment of 1-1/4-inches.
2. Where wythes are of different materials, use adjustable ties composed of 2 parts; 1 with
pintles, the other with eyes; with maximum misalignment of 1-1/4-inches.
B. Wire: Fabricate from 3/16-inch-diameter, galvanized steel wire.
2.8 ADJUSTABLE ANCHORS FOR CONNECTING TO STEEL FRAME
A. General: Provide two-piece assemblies that allow vertical or horizontal adjustment but resist tension
and compression forces perpendicular to plane of wall.
1. Anchor Section: Crimped 1/4-inch-diameter, hot-dip galvanized steel wire anchor section for
welding to steel.
2. Tie Section: Triangular-shaped wire tie, sized to extend within 1 inch of masonry face, made
from 0.1875-inch- diameter, hot-dip galvanized steel wire.
2.9 RIGID ANCHORS
A. General: Fabricate from steel bars as follows:
UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES Section 04 81 00 - 10
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
1. 1 ½-inches wide by ¼-inch thick by 24-inches long, with ends turned up 2-inches or with
cross pins.
2. As indicated.
3. Finish: Hot-dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 153 for interior wall applications.
Stainless steel at both wythes of all exterior masonry walls.
2.10 MISCELLANEOUS ANCHORS
A. Unit Type Inserts in Concrete: Cast-iron or malleable-iron inserts of type and size indicated.
B. Dovetail Slots: Furnish dovetail slots with filler strips, of slot size indicated, fabricated from
0.0336-inch, galvanized steel sheet.
C. Anchor Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and,
where indicated, flat washers; hot-dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 153, Class C; of diameter
and length indicated and in the following configurations:
1. Headed bolts.
2. Nonheaded bolts, bent in manner indicated.
2.11 EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS
A. Contractor's Option for Concealed Flashing: For flashing partly exposed to the exterior, use metal
flashing specified. For flashing not exposed to the exterior, use the following, unless otherwise
indicated:
1. Rubberized-Asphalt Flashing: Manufacturer's standard composite flashing product consisting
of a pliable and highly adhesive rubberized-asphalt compound, bonded to a high-density,
cross-laminated polyethylene film to produce an overall thickness of 0.030-inch.
2. Elastomeric Thermoplastic Flashing: Manufacturer's standard composite flashing product
consisting of a polyester-reinforced ethylene interpolymer alloy 0.025-inch-thick with a
0.015-inch-thick layer of rubberized-asphalt adhesive.
a. Provide flashing as a complete system with preformed corners, end dams, other
special shapes, and seaming materials; all produced by flashing sheet manufacturer.
B. Solder and Sealants for Sheet Metal Flashings: As specified in Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal
Flashing and Trim."
C. Adhesives, Primers, and Seam Tapes for Flashings: Flashing manufacturer's standard products or
products recommended by the flashing manufacturer for bonding flashing sheets to each other and to
substrates.
D. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated
into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
E. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
1. Rubberized-Asphalt Flashing:
UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES Section 04 81 00 - 11
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
a. Dur-O-Barrier; Dur-O-Wal, Inc.
b. Perm-A-Barrier Wall Flashing; W. R. Grace & Co., Construction Products Division.
c. Textroflash; Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.
d. Poly-Barrier Self-Adhering Wall Flashing; Polytite Manufacturing Corp.
e. Polyguard 300; Polyguard Products, Inc.
f. Everlastic MF-40; Williams Products, Inc.
2. Elastomeric Thermoplastic Flashing:
a. Hyload Flashing Membrane; Hyload Cloaked Flashing System.
2.12 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES
A. Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1;
compressible up to 35 percent; of width and thickness indicated; formulated from neoprene or PVC.
B. Preformed Control-Joint Gaskets: Material as indicated below, designed to fit standard sash block
and to maintain lateral stability in masonry wall; size and configuration as indicated.
1. Styrene-Butadiene-Rubber Compound: ASTM D 2000, Designation M2AA-805.
2. PVC: ASTM D 2287, Type PVC-65406.
C. Bond-Breaker Strips: Asphalt-saturated, organic roofing felt complying with ASTM D 226, Type I
(No. 15 asphalt felt).
D. Round Plastic Weep/Vent Tubing: Medium-density polyethylene, 3/8-inch OD by 4-inches long.
E. Rectangular Plastic Weep/Vent Tubing: Clear butyrate, ⅜ by 1 ½-inches by 3 ½-inches
F. Wicking Material: Cotton or polyester rope, ¼ to ⅜-inch in diameter, in length required to produce
2-inch exposure on exterior and 18-inches in cavity between wythes.
G. Cavity Drainage Material: 2-inch-thick, free-draining mesh; made from polyethylene strands and
shaped to avoid being clogged by mortar droppings.
H. Reinforcing Bar Positioners: Wire units designed to fit into mortar bed joints spanning masonry unit
cells with loops for holding reinforcing bars in center of cells. Units are formed from 0.187-inch
steel wire, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.
1. Provide units with either two loops or four loops as needed for number of bars indicated.
I. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, cavity drainage materials that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
J. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
1. Plastic Weep Hole/Vent:
a. Cell Vent; Dur-O-Wal, Inc.
2. Cavity Drainage Material:
a. Mortar Break; Advanced Building Products, Inc.
b. CavClear Masonry Mat; CavClear.
UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES Section 04 81 00 - 12
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
c. Mortar Net; Mortar Net USA, Ltd.
d. Mortar Stop; Polytite Manufacturing Corp.
3. Reinforcing Bar Positioners:
a. D/A 811; Dur-O-Wal, Inc.
b. D/A 816; Dur-O-Wal, Inc.
c. No. 376 Rebar Positioner; Heckman Building Products, Inc.
d. #RB Rebar Positioner; Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.
e. #RB-Twin Rebar Positioner; Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.
f. Double O-Ring Rebar Positioner; Masonry Reinforcing Corporation of America.
g. O-Ring Rebar Positioner; Masonry Reinforcing Corporation of America.
2.13 MASONRY CLEANERS
A. Job-Mixed Detergent Solution: Solution of 1/2-cup dry measure tetrasodium polyphosphate and
1/2-cup dry measure laundry detergent dissolved in 1 gal. of water.
B. Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard-strength cleaner designed for removing
mortar/grout stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains from new masonry without
discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces. Use product expressly approved for intended use by
cleaner manufacturer and manufacturer of masonry units being cleaned.
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be used to
clean unit masonry surfaces include, but are not limited to, the following:
2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Cleaners for Red and Light-Colored Brick Not Subject to Metallic Staining with
Mortar Not Subject to Bleaching:
1) 202 New Masonry Detergent; Diedrich Technologies, Inc.
2) Sure Klean No. 600 Detergent; ProSoCo, Inc.
b. Cleaners for Red and Dark-Colored Brick Not Subject to Metallic Staining:
1) 200 Lime Solv; Diedrich Technologies, Inc.
2) Sure Klean No. 101 Lime Solvent; ProSoCo., Inc.
c. Cleaners for Brick Subject to Metallic Staining:
1) 202V Vana-Stop; Diedrich Technologies, Inc.
2) Sure Klean Vana Trol; ProSoCo, Inc.
2.14 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES
A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators, retarders,
water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout.
2. Add cold-weather admixture (if used) at the same rate for all mortar, regardless of weather
conditions, to ensure that mortar color is consistent.
B. Preblended, Dry Mortar Mix: Furnish dry mortar ingredients in the form of a preblended mix.
Measure quantities by weight to ensure accurate proportions, and thoroughly blend ingredients
before delivering to Project site.
UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES Section 04 81 00 - 13
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
C. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Property Specification.
1. Extended-Life Mortar for Unit Masonry: Mortar complying with ASTM C 1142 may be used
instead of mortar specified above, at Contractor's option.
2. Limit cementitious materials in mortar to portland cement, mortar cement, and lime.
3. For reinforced masonry and where indicated, use Type S.
4. For exterior, above-grade, load-bearing and non-load-bearing walls and parapet walls; for
interior load-bearing walls; for interior non-load-bearing partitions; and for other applications
where another type is not indicated, use Type N.
D. Pigmented Mortar: Select and proportion pigments with other ingredients to produce color required.
Limit pigments to the following percentages of cement content by weight:
1. For mineral-oxide pigments and portland cement-lime mortar, not more than 10 percent.
2. For carbon-black pigment and portland cement-lime mortar, not more than 2 percent.
3. For mineral-oxide pigments and masonry cement mortar, not more than 5 percent.
4. For carbon-black pigment and masonry cement mortar, not more than 1 percent.
E. Colored-Aggregate Mortar: Produce required mortar color by using colored aggregates combined
with selected cementitious materials.
1. Mix to match Architect's sample.
F. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476.
1. Use grout of type indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, of type (fine or coarse) that will
comply with Table 5 of ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for dimensions of grout spaces and
pour height.
2. Provide grout with a slump of 8 to 11-inches as measured according to ASTM C 143.
2.15 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Owner will engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform source quality-control testing
indicated below:
1. Payment for these services will be made by Owner from the Inspection and Testing
Allowance, as authorized by Change Orders].
2. Retesting of materials failing to meet specified requirements shall be done at Contractor's
expense.
B. Brick Tests: For each type and grade of brick indicated, units will be tested according to
ASTM C 67.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation
UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES Section 04 81 00 - 14
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.
1. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to
performance.
2. Verify that foundations are within tolerances specified.
3. Verify that reinforcing dowels are properly placed.
4. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
B. Before installation, examine rough-in and built-in construction to verify actual locations of piping
connections.
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Thickness: Build cavity and composite walls and other masonry construction to the full thickness
shown. Build single-wythe walls to the actual widths of masonry units, using units of widths
indicated.
B. Build chases and recesses to accommodate items specified in this Section and in other Sections of the
Specifications.
C. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completing masonry. After installing
equipment, complete masonry to match the construction immediately adjacent to the opening.
D. Cut masonry units with motor-driven saws to provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Cut units as
required to provide a continuous pattern and to fit adjoining construction. Where possible, use
full-size units without cutting. Allow units cut with water-cooled saws to dry before placing, unless
wetting of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges
concealed.
E. Select and arrange units for exposed unit masonry to produce a uniform blend of colors and textures.
1. Mix units from several pallets or cubes as they are placed.
F. Wetting of Brick: Wet brick before laying if the initial rate of absorption exceeds 30 g/30 sq. in. per
minute when tested per ASTM C 67. Allow units to absorb water so they are damp but not wet at the
time of laying.
3.3 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES
A. Comply with tolerances in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 and the following:
B. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and expansion and
control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 20 feet, nor 1/2 inch maximum.
C. For vertical alignment of exposed head joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10
feet, nor 1/2 inch maximum.
UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES Section 04 81 00 - 15
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
D. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as exposed lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not vary
from level by more than 1/4 inch in 20 feet, nor 1/2 inch maximum.
E. For exposed bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch,
with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch. Do not vary from bed-joint thickness of adjacent
courses by more than 1/8 inch.
F. For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch.
Do not vary from adjacent bed-joint and head-joint thicknesses by more than 1/8 inch.
3.4 LAYING MASONRY WALLS
A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint thicknesses
and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets. Avoid using
less-than-half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where possible, at other locations.
B. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Lay exposed masonry in the following bond pattern; do not use
units with less than nominal 4-inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs.
1. One-half running bond with vertical joint in each course centered on units in courses above
and below at all interior walls and at typical locations.
C. Lay concealed masonry with all units in a wythe in running bond or bonded by lapping not less than
2-inches. Bond and interlock each course of each wythe at corners. Do not use units with less than
nominal 4-inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs.
D. Stopping and Resuming Work: In each course, rack back one-half-unit length for one-half running
bond or one-third-unit length for one-third running bond; do not tooth. Clean exposed surfaces of set
masonry, wet clay masonry units lightly if required, and remove loose masonry units and mortar
before laying fresh masonry.
E. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified under this and other Sections of
the Specifications. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items.
F. Fill space between hollow-metal frames and masonry solidly with mortar, unless otherwise indicated.
G. Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer of metal lath
in the joint below and rod mortar or grout into core.
H. Fill cores in hollow concrete masonry units with grout 24-inches under bearing plates, beams, lintels,
posts, and similar items, unless otherwise indicated.
I. Build non-load-bearing interior partitions full height of story to underside of roof structure above,
unless otherwise indicated.
1. Install compressible filler in joint between top of partition and underside of structure above.
2. Wedge non-load-bearing partitions against structure above with small pieces of tile, slate, or
metal. Fill joint with mortar after dead-load deflection of structure above approaches final
position.
UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES Section 04 81 00 - 16
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
3. At fire-rated partitions, install firestopping in joint between top of partition and underside of
structure above to comply with Building Code Requirements.
3.5 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING
A. Lay hollow masonry units as follows:
1. With full mortar coverage on horizontal and vertical face shells.
2. Bed webs in mortar in starting course on footings and in all courses of piers, columns, and
pilasters, and where adjacent to cells or cavities to be filled with grout.
3. For starting course on footings where cells are not grouted, spread out full mortar bed,
including areas under cells.
B. Lay solid brick-size masonry units with completely filled bed and head joints; butter ends with
sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not deeply furrow bed joints or slush
head joints.
1. At cavity walls, bevel beds away from cavity, to minimize mortar protrusions into cavity. As
work progresses, trowel mortar fins protruding into cavity flat against the cavity face of the
brick.
C. Set stone trim units in full bed of mortar with vertical joints slushed full. Fill dowel, anchor, and
similar holes solid. Wet stone-joint surface thoroughly before setting; for soiled stone surfaces, clean
bedding and exposed surfaces with fiber brush and soap powder and rinse thoroughly with clear
water.
D. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than the joint
thickness, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Cut joints flush for masonry walls to receive plaster or other direct-applied finishes (other than
paint), unless otherwise indicated.
3.6 BONDING OF MULTIWYTHE MASONRY
A. Use individual metal ties installed in horizontal joints to bond wythes together. Provide ties as
shown, but not less than one metal tie for 1.33 sq. ft. of wall area spaced not to exceed 12-inches o.c.
horizontally and 16-inches o.c. vertically. Stagger ties in alternate courses. Provide additional ties
within 12-inches of openings and space not more than 36-inches apart around perimeter of openings.
At intersecting and abutting walls, provide ties at no more than 24-inches o.c. vertically.
B. Use masonry joint reinforcement installed in horizontal mortar joints to bond wythes together.
C. Use either bonding system specified above.
D. Use bonding system indicated on Drawings.
E. Corners: Provide interlocking masonry unit bond in each wythe and course at corners, unless
otherwise indicated.
UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES Section 04 81 00 - 17
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
1. Provide continuity with masonry joint reinforcement at corners by using prefabricated "L"
units as well as masonry bonding.
F. Intersecting and Abutting Walls: Unless vertical expansion or control joints are shown at juncture,
bond walls together as follows:
1. Provide individual metal ties not more than 16-inches o.c.
2. Provide continuity with masonry joint reinforcement by using prefabricated "T" units.
3. Provide rigid metal anchors not more than 24-inches o.c. If used with hollow masonry units,
embed ends in mortar-filled cores.
3.7 CAVITIES
A. Keep cavities clean of mortar droppings and other materials during construction.
1. Use wood strips temporarily placed in cavity to collect mortar droppings. As work
progresses, remove strips, clean off mortar droppings, and replace in cavity.
2. Provide temporary opening by omitting 1 brick every 48-inches at bottom of cavity and in
first course above flashing. After wall has been built to top of cavity and mortar has set, clean
out cavity and then close temporary opening.
B. See Division 07 Section 07 27 26 "Fluid-Applied Air Barrier" for coating of masonry wall backup.
C. Cavity-Wall Insulation shall be installed as in Section 07 21 00 “Building Insulation”.
1. Fill cracks and open gaps in insulation with crack sealer compatible with insulation and
masonry.
3.8 MASONRY JOINT REINFORCEMENT
A. General: Provide continuous masonry joint reinforcement as indicated. Install entire length of
longitudinal side rods in mortar with a minimum cover of 5/8 inch on exterior side of walls, 1/2 inch
elsewhere. Lap reinforcement a minimum of 6-inches.
1. Space reinforcement not more than 16-inches o.c.
2. Provide reinforcement not more than 8-inches above and below wall openings and extending
12-inches beyond openings.
B. Cut or interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Provide continuity at corners and wall intersections by using prefabricated "L" and "T" sections. Cut
and bend reinforcing units as directed by manufacturer for continuity at returns, offsets, column
fireproofing, pipe enclosures, and other special conditions.
UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES Section 04 81 00 - 18
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
3.9 ANCHORING MASONRY TO STRUCTURAL MEMBERS
A. Anchor masonry to structural members where masonry abuts or faces structural members to comply
with the following:
1. Provide an open space not less than 1-inch in width between masonry and structural member,
unless otherwise indicated. Keep open space free of mortar or other rigid materials.
2. Anchor masonry to structural members with flexible anchors embedded in masonry joints and
attached to structure.
3. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 24-inches o.c. vertically and 36-inches o.c.
horizontally.
3.10 ANCHORING MASONRY VENEERS
A. Anchor masonry veneers to wall framing and masonry backup with masonry-veneer anchors to
comply with the following requirements:
1. Fasten each anchor section through sheathing to wall framing or to concrete and masonry
backup with two metal fasteners of type indicated.
2. Embed tie sections in masonry joints. Provide not less than 2-inches of air space between
back of masonry veneer and face of sheathing.
3. Locate anchor sections to allow maximum vertical differential movement of ties up and down.
4. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 16-inches o.c. vertically and 12-inches o.c.
horizontally, with not less than 1 anchor for each 1.33 sq. ft. of wall area. Install additional
anchors within 12-inches of openings and at intervals, not exceeding 8-inches, around the
perimeter.
3.11 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS
A. General: Install control and expansion joints in unit masonry where indicated. Build-in related items
as masonry progresses. Do not form a continuous span through movement joints unless provisions
are made to prevent in-plane restraint of wall or partition movement.
B. Form control joints in concrete masonry as follows:
1. Fit bond-breaker strips into hollow contour in ends of concrete masonry units on one side of
control joint. Fill resultant core with grout and rake joints in exposed faces.
2. Install preformed control-joint gaskets designed to fit standard sash block.
3. Install interlocking units designed for control joints. Install bond-breaker strips at joint. Keep
head joints free and clear of mortar or rake joint.
4. Install temporary foam-plastic filler in head joints and remove filler when unit masonry is
complete.
C. Form expansion joints in brick made from clay or shale as follows:
1. Build flanges of metal expansion strips into masonry. Lap each joint 4-inches in direction of
water flow. Seal joints below grade and at junctures with horizontal expansion joints, if any.
2. Build flanges of factory-fabricated, expansion-joint units into masonry.
UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES Section 04 81 00 - 19
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
3. Build in joint fillers where indicated.
4. Form open joint of width indicated, but not less than ⅜-inch for installation of sealant and
backer rod specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants." Keep joint free and clear of
mortar.
D. Build in horizontal, pressure-relieving joints where indicated; construct joints by either leaving an air
space or inserting a compressible filler of width required for installing sealant and backer rod
specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."
1. Locate horizontal, pressure-relieving joints beneath shelf angles supporting masonry veneer
and attached to structure behind masonry veneer.
3.12 LINTELS
A. Install steel lintels where indicated. Hot dip galvanized.
B. Provide masonry lintels where shown and where openings of more than 12-inches for brick-size units
and 24-inches for block-size units are shown without structural steel or other supporting lintels.
1. Provide precast lintels made from concrete with reinforcing bars indicated or required to
support loads indicated. Cure precast lintels by the same method used for concrete masonry
units.
2. Provide prefabricated or built-in-place masonry lintels. Use specially formed bond beam
units with reinforcing bars placed as indicated and filled with coarse grout. Cure precast
lintels before handling and installing. Temporarily support built-in-place lintels until cured.
3. Provide either of above at Contractor's option or provide precast or formed-in-place concrete
lintels complying with requirements in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
C. Provide minimum bearing of 8-inches at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated.
3.13 FLASHING, WEEP HOLES, AND VENTS
A. General: Install embedded flashing and weep holes in masonry at shelf angles, lintels, ledges, other
obstructions to downward flow of water in wall, and where indicated.
B. Prepare masonry surfaces so they are smooth and free from projections that could puncture flashing.
Unless otherwise indicated, place through-wall flashing on sloping bed of mortar and cover with
mortar. Before covering with mortar, seal penetrations in flashing with adhesive, sealant, or tape as
recommended by flashing manufacturer.
C. Install flashing as follows:
1. At multiwythe masonry walls, including cavity walls, extend flashing from exterior face of
outer wythe of masonry, through outer wythe, turned up a minimum of 8-inches, and through
inner wythe to within ½-inch of the interior face of the wall in exposed masonry. Where
interior surface of inner wythe is concealed by furring, carry flashing completely through
inner wythe and turn flashing up approximately 2 inches, unless otherwise indicated.
2. At masonry-veneer walls, extend flashing from exterior face of veneer, through veneer, up
UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES Section 04 81 00 - 20
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
face of sheathing at least 8 inches, and behind air-infiltration barrier or building paper.
3. At lintels and shelf angles, extend flashing a minimum of 4 inches into masonry at each end.
At heads and sills, extend flashing 4 inches at ends and turn flashing up not less than 2 inches
to form a pan.
4. Interlock end joints of ribbed sheet metal flashing by overlapping ribs not less than 1-1/2
inches or as recommended by flashing manufacturer, and seal lap with elastomeric sealant
complying with requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for application
indicated.
5. Extend sheet metal flashing 1/2 inch beyond face of masonry at exterior and turn flashing
down to form a drip.
6. Install metal drip edges beneath flashing at exterior face of wall. Stop flashing 1/2 inch back
from outside face of wall and adhere flashing to top of metal drip edge.
7. Install metal flashing termination beneath flashing at exterior face of wall. Stop flashing 1/2
inch back from outside face of wall and adhere flashing to top of metal flashing termination.
8. Cut flashing off flush with face of wall after masonry wall construction is completed.
D. Install weep holes in the head joints in exterior wythes of the first course of masonry immediately
above embedded flashing and as follows:
1. Use round plastic tubing with wicking material to form weep holes.
2. Use wicking material to form weep holes above flashing in brick sills. Turn wicking down at
lip of sill to be as inconspicuous as possible.
3. Space weep holes 24 inches o.c.
4. Space weep holes formed from plastic tubing or wicking material 16 inches o.c.
5. In cavities, place pea gravel to a height equal to height of first course, but not less than 2
inches, immediately above top of flashing embedded in the wall, as masonry construction
progresses, to splatter mortar droppings and to maintain drainage.
6. Place cavity drainage material immediately above flashing in cavities.
E. Trim wicking material used in weep holes flush with outside face of wall after mortar has set.
F. Install vents in vertical head joints at the top of each continuous cavity at spacing indicated. Use
rectangular plastic tubing to form vents.
1. Close cavities off vertically and horizontally with blocking in manner indicated. Install
through-wall flashing and weep holes above horizontal blocking.
G. Install reglets and nailers for flashing and other related construction where they are shown to be built
into masonry.
3.14 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY INSTALLATION
A. Temporary Formwork and Shores: Construct formwork and shores to support reinforced masonry
elements during construction.
1. Construct formwork to conform to shape, line, and dimensions shown. Make it sufficiently
tight to prevent leakage of mortar and grout. Brace, tie, and support forms to maintain
position and shape during construction and curing of reinforced masonry.
2. Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have hardened
UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES Section 04 81 00 - 21
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
sufficiently to carry their own weight and other temporary loads that may be placed on them
during construction.
B. Placing Reinforcement: Comply with requirements of ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.
C. Grouting: Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained sufficient
strength to resist grout pressure.
1. Comply with requirements of ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for cleanouts and for grout
placement, including minimum grout space and maximum pour height.
3.15 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Owner will engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform field quality-control testing
indicated below.
1. Payment for these services will be made by Owner from the Inspection and Testing
Allowance, as authorized by Change Orders.
2. Retesting of materials failing to meet specified requirements shall be done at Contractor's
expense.
B. Mortar properties will be tested per ASTM C 780.
C. Grout will be sampled and tested for compressive strength per ASTM C 1019.
D. Brick Tests: For each type and grade of brick indicated, units will be tested according to
ASTM C 67.
E. Concrete Masonry Unit Tests: For each type of concrete masonry unit indicated, units will be tested
according to ASTM C 140.
3.16 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING
A. Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise damaged or
that do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units; install in fresh mortar,
pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement.
B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge voids and holes, except weep holes, and completely
fill with mortar. Point up joints, including corners, openings, and adjacent construction, to provide a
neat, uniform appearance. Prepare joints for sealant application.
C. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove mortar fins
and smears before tooling joints.
D. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows:
1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes or
chisels.
UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES Section 04 81 00 - 22
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
2. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for
comparison purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before proceeding with
cleaning of masonry.
3. Protect adjacent stone and nonmasonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering them
with liquid strippable masking agent, polyethylene film, or waterproof masking tape.
4. Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by rinsing
the surfaces thoroughly with clear water.
5. Clean brick by the bucket-and-brush hand-cleaning method described in BIA Technical Notes
No. 20, using job-mixed detergent solution.
6. Clean masonry with a proprietary acidic cleaner applied according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
7. Clean concrete masonry by cleaning method indicated in NCMA TEK 8-2 applicable to type
of stain on exposed surfaces.
8. Clean limestone units to comply with recommendations in the Indiana Limestone Institute of
America's "Indiana Limestone Handbook."
3.17 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL
A. Excess Masonry Waste: Remove excess, clean masonry waste and other masonry waste, and legally
dispose of off Owner's property.
3.18 SCHEDULE OF TYPES AND COLORS OF MASONRY UNITS AND MORTAR
A. Type 1: CMU – 4”, 6”, 8”, 10” and 12” x 16” x 8” light weight Concrete Masonry Units.
1. Color: Gray block and mortar.
2. Special Shapes: Provide bullnose units for exposed outside corners.
B. Face Brick – No Substitutions
1. Type 1:
a. Manufacturer: Kinney Brick
b. Color: Red Velour modular or Varsity Velour modular
2. Type 2:
a. Manufacturer: Meridian Brick
b. Color: Wheat Velour modular
3. Type 3:
a. Manufacturer: Meridian Brick
b. Color: V-500 Velour modular
C. Mortar: All mortar shall be gray colored mortar.
D. Field color samples must be approved by Architect prior to fabrication of brick.
END OF SECTION
STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING Section 05 12 00 - 1
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
SECTION 05 12 00 - STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 01 Specification Sections apply to work of this Section.
1.2 DESCRPTION OF WORK
A. Extent of structural steel work is shown on drawings including schedules, notes and details which
show size and location of members, typical connections, and type of steel required. Furnish all labor,
materials, services, equipment and appliances required in conjunction with or related to the furnishing,
fabrication, delivery, and erection of all structural steel defined below. Include all supplementary
parts, members and connections necessary to complete the structural steel work, regardless of whether
all such items are specifically shown or specified on the drawings.
B. Structural steel shall be defined as that work prescribed in Section 2.1 of the AISC Code of Standard
Practice and the following items: angle frames for openings in roofs, miscellaneous metal deck
support and edge angles, shop welded metal studs, all connection material, temporary construction
bracing, and all other structural steel shown or specified on the drawings to be part of the work. Labor
shall include shop painting as specified, field touch-up painting, and grouting of base plates and
bearing plates.
C. Miscellaneous metal fabrications, architecturally exposed structural steel, metal ladders, steel joists and
metal deck are specified elsewhere in these Contract Documents.
D. Related Sections:
1. Section 05 21 00 – Steel Joist Framing
2. Section 05 31 00 – Steel Decking: Support framing for small openings in deck.
3. Section 05 50 00 – Metal Fabrications
4. Section 05 52 10 – Pipe and Tube Railings
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings including complete details and schedules for fabrication and
assembly of structural steel members, details, schedules, procedures, and diagrams showing sequence
of erection. Shop drawings not complying with the requirements in this Section will not be reviewed.
1. Structural Steel shop drawings shall include the following:
a. Details of cuts, connections, camber, holes, and other pertinent data.
b. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, and show size, length and type of each
weld.
c. Holes, flange cuts, slots and openings shall be made as required by the structural
drawings, all of which shall be properly located by means of templates.
STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING Section 05 12 00 - 2
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
B. Fabrication:
1. Fabricator alone shall be responsible for all errors of detailing, fabrication, and for the correct
fitting of the structural members.
2. All fabricated materials and connections shall fit within architectural constraints.
3. Structural steel members for which shop drawings have not been reviewed and approved shall
not be fabricated.
C. The omission from the shop drawings of any materials required by the Contract Documents shall not
relieve the Contractor of the responsibility of furnishing and installing such materials, even though the
shop drawings may have been reviewed and approved.
D. Test Reports: Submit copies of reports of test conducted on all field-welded connections that are
inspected. Include data on type(s) of tests conducted and test results.
E. Welders Certificates: Certify welders employed on the Work, verifying AWS qualification within the
previous 12 months.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabricate structural steel members in accordance with AISC (MAN) "Steel Construction Manual."
B. Structural steel members designated as architecturally-exposed structural steel (AESS) to also comply
with Section 05 12 13.
C. Fabricator: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 5 years of
documented experience.
D. Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified steel fabricator that is accredited by the International
Accreditation Service (IAS) Fabricator Inspection Program for Structural Steel in accordance with IAS
AC172.
E. Erector: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 5 years of
documented experience.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Structural Steel: All hot-rolled steel plates, shapes, sheet piling, and bars shall be new steel conforming
to ASTM Specification A6 “Standard Specification for General Requirements for Rolled Steel Plates,
Shapes, Sheet Piling, and Bars for Structural Use”. Structural steel shall comply with the provisions of
the following ASTM Specifications as appropriate for the grades and types, and at the location as
specified in the drawings:
1. Steel Angles and Plates: ASTM A36/A36M.
2. Steel Shapes and Tees: ASTM A992/A992M.
3. Rolled Steel Structural Shapes: ASTM A992/A992M.
STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING Section 05 12 00 - 3
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
B. Steel Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A242/A242M high-strength, corrosion-resistant structural steel.
C. Steel Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A529/A529M high-strength, carbon-manganese structural steel,
Grade 50.
D. Steel Plates and Bars: ASTM A572/A572M, Grade 50 (345) high-strength, columbium-vanadium
steel.
E. Steel Plate: ASTM A514/A514M.
F. Steel Sheet: ASTM A1011/A1011M, Designation SS, Grade 30 hot-rolled, or ASTM
A1008/A1008M, Designation SS, Grade 30 cold-rolled.
G. Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M, Grade B.
H. Shear Stud Connectors: Made from ASTM A108 Grade 1015 bars.
I. Structural Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel, ASTM A307, Grade A and galvanized in compliance with
ASTM A153/A153M, Class C.
J. High-Strength Structural Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM F3125/F3125M, Type 1, with matching
compatible ASTM A563 or ASTM A563M nuts and ASTM F436/F436M washers.
K. Unheaded Anchor Rods: ASTM F1554, Grade 36, plain, with matching ASTM A563 or ASTM
A563M nuts and ASTM F436/F436M Type 1 washers.
L. Headed Anchor Rods: ASTM A307, Grade C, plain.
M. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1/D1.1M; type required for materials being welded.
N. Primer Paint
1. Shop and Touch-Up Primer: Fabricator's standard, complying with VOC limitations of
authorities having jurisdiction. Gray color.
2.2 FABRICATION
A. Shop fabricate to greatest extent possible.
2.3 FINISH
A. Shop prime structural steel members. Do not prime surfaces that will be fireproofed, field welded, in
contact with concrete, or high strength bolted.
STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING Section 05 12 00 - 4
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. High-Strength Bolts: Provide testing and verification of shop-bolted connections in accordance with
RCSC (HSBOLT) "Specification for Structural Joints Using High-Strength Bolts", testing at least 5
percent of bolts at each connection.
B. Welded Connections: Visually inspect all shop-welded connections and test at least 5 percent of welds
using one of the following:
1. Non-Destructive Testing
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that conditions are appropriate for erection of structural steel and that the work may properly
proceed.
3.2 ERECTION
A. Erect structural steel in compliance with AISC 303.
B. Allow for erection loads, and provide sufficient temporary bracing to maintain structure in safe
condition, plumb, and in true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent
bracing.
3.3 TOLERANCES
A. Dimensional Tolerances: Dimensional tolerances of fabricated structural steel shall conform to Section
6.4 of the AISC Code of Standard Practice
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. An independent testing agency will perform field quality control tests, as specified in Section 01400 -
Quality Control.
END OF SECTION
STEEL JOIST FRAMING Section 05 21 00 - 1
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
SECTION 05 21 00 - STEEL JOIST FRAMING
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract include General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 01 Specification Sections apply to the work of this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Open web steel joists and shear stud connectors, with bridging, attached seats and anchors.
B. Loose bearing members, such as plates or angles, and anchor bolts for site placement.
C. Supplementary framing for roof openings greater than 18 inches (450 mm).
1.3 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 05 12 00 - Structural Steel Framing: Grouting base plates and bearing plates. Superstructure
framing.
B. Section 05 12 00 - Structural Steel Framing: Superstructure framing.
C. Section 05 31 00 - Steel Decking: Bearing plates and angles.
D. Section 05 31 00 - Steel Decking: Support framing for openings less than 18 inches (450 mm) in
decking.
E. Section 05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications: Non-framing steel fabrications attached to joists.
1.4 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM A307 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts, Studs, and Threaded Rod 60 000 PSI
Tensile Strength; 2014 (Editorial 2017).
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Indicate standard designations, joist coding, configurations, sizes, spacings, cambers,
locations of joists, joist leg extensions, bridging, connections, and attachments.
STEEL JOIST FRAMING Section 05 21 00 - 2
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Design connections not detailed on drawings under direct supervision of a Professional Structural
Engineer experienced in design of this work and licensed in the State in which the Project is located.
B. Perform Work, including that for headers and other supplementary framing, in accordance with SJI
100 Standard Specifications Load Tables and SJI Technical Digest No. 9.
C. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with
minimum five (5) years documented experience.
D. Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified steel fabricator that is accredited by the International
Accreditation Service (IAS) Fabricator Inspection Program for Structural Steel in accordance with IAS
AC172.
E. Erector Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum
five (5) years documented experience.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Transport, handle, store, and protect products to SJI requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Open Web Joists: DLH-Series and K-Series
1. Provide bottom chord extensions as indicated.
2. Minimum End Bearing on Steel Supports: Comply with referenced SJI standard.
3. Minimum End Bearing on Concrete or Masonry Supports: Comply with referenced SJI
standard.
4. Finish: Shop primed, gray paint
B. Anchor Bolts, Nuts and Washers: ASTM A307, hot-dip galvanized per ASTM A153/A153M, Class C.
C. High-Strength Structural Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM F3125/F3125M, Type 1, with matching
compatible ASTM A563 or ASTM A563M nuts and ASTM F436/F436M washers.
D. Tension Control Bolts: Twist-off type; ASTM F3125/F3125M.
E. Shear Stud Connectors: Made from ASTM A108 Grade 1015 bars.
F. Structural Steel For Supplementary Framing and Joist Leg Extensions: ASTM A36/A36M.
G. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1/D1.1M; type required for materials being welded.
STEEL JOIST FRAMING Section 05 21 00 - 3
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
H. Primer Paint:
1. Shop and Touch-Up Primer: SSPC-Paint 15, complying with VOC limitations of authorities
having jurisdiction.
2. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: SSPC-Paint 20, Type I - Inorganic, complying
with VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction.
2.2 FABRICATION
A. Drill holes in chords for attachment of wood nailers where indicated.
B. Frame special sized openings in joist web framing as detailed.
2.3 FINISH
A. Prepare surfaces to be finished in accordance with SSPC-SP 2.
B. Paint: Gray
2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. High-Strength Bolts: Provide testing and verification of shop-bolted connections in accordance with
RCSC (HSBOLT) "Specification for Structural Joints Using High-Strength Bolts", testing at least 15
percent of bolts at each connection.
B. Welded Connections: Visually inspect all shop-welded connections and test at least 10 percent of
welds using one of the following:
1. Non-Destructive Testing
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify existing conditions prior to beginning work.
3.2 ERECTION
A. Erect joists with correct bearing on supports.
B. Allow for erection loads. Provide sufficient temporary bracing to maintain framing safe, plumb, and in
true alignment.
C. Coordinate the placement of anchors for securing loose bearing members furnished as part of the work
of this section.
STEEL JOIST FRAMING Section 05 21 00 - 4
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
D. After joist alignment and installation of framing, field weld joist seats to steel bearing surfaces.
E. Position and field weld joist chord extensions and wall attachments as detailed.
F. Install supplementary framing for roof openings greater than 18 inches (450 mm).
G. Do not permit erection of decking until joists are braced, bridged, and secured or until completion of
erection and installation of permanent bridging and bracing.
H. Do not field cut or alter structural members without approval of joist manufacturer.
I. After erection, prime welds, damaged shop primer, damaged galvanizing, and surfaces not shop
primed, except surfaces specified not to be primed.
3.3 TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch.
B. Maximum Offset From True Alignment: 1/4 inch.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. An independent testing agency will perform field quality control tests, as specified in Section 01400 -
Quality Control.
B. High-Strength Bolts: Provide testing and verification of field-bolted connections in accordance with
RCSC (HSBOLT) "Specification for Structural Joints Using High-Strength Bolts", testing at least 15
percent of bolts at each connection.
C. Welded Connections: Visually inspect all field-welded connections and test at least 10 percent of
welds using one of the following:
END OF SECTION
STEEL DECKING Section 05 31 00 - 1
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
SECTION 05 31 00 – STEEL DECKING
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplemental Conditions and
Division 01 Specification Sections apply to the work of this Section.
1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 03 20 00 - Concrete Reinforcing.
B. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Concrete topping over metal deck.
C. Section 04 20 00 - Unit Masonry: Placement of anchors for bearing plates embedded in unit masonry
assemblies.
D. Section 05 12 00 - Structural Steel Framing: Support framing for openings larger than 18 inches (450
mm) and shear stud connectors.
1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel; 2015, with Errata (2016).
B. SDI (DM) - Publication No.30, Design Manual for Composite Decks, Form Decks, and Roof Decks;
2007.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Indicate deck plan, support locations, projections, openings, reinforcement, pertinent
details, and accessories.
B. Product Data: Provide deck profile characteristics, dimensions, structural properties, and finishes.
C. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions.
D. Welders Certificates: Certify welders employed on the Work, verifying AWS qualification within the
previous 12 months.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Design deck layout, spans, fastening, and joints under direct supervision of a Professional Structural
Engineer experienced in design of this work and licensed in the State of Texas.
STEEL DECKING Section 05 31 00 - 2
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Cut plastic wrap to encourage ventilation.
B. Separate sheets and store deck on dry wood sleepers; slope for positive drainage.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Steel Deck: Vulcraft or approved equal.
2.2 STEEL DECK
A. All Deck Types: Select and design metal deck in accordance with SDI Design Manual.
1. Calculate to structural working stress design and structural properties specified.
2.3 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A. Bearing Plates and Angles: ASTM A36/A36M steel, galvanized per ASTM A123/A123M.
B. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
C. Fasteners: Galvanized hardened steel, self-tapping.
D. Powder Actuated Mechanical Fasteners: Steel; with knurled shank and forged ballistic point. Comply
with applicable requirements of ICC-ES AC70.
1. Products:
E. Mechanical Fasteners: Steel; hex washer head, self-drilling, self-tapping.
F. Shop and Touch-Up Primer: SSPC-Paint 15, complying with VOC limitations of authorities having
jurisdiction.
G. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: SSPC-Pain 20, complying with VOC limitations of
authorities having jurisdiction.
H. Flute Closures: Closed cell foam rubber, 1 ½-inch thick; profiled to fit tight to the deck.
2.4 FABRICATED DECK ACCESSORIES
A. Sheet Metal Deck Accessories: Metal closure strips, wet concrete stops, and cover plates, 22-gauge
sheet steel; of profile and size as indicated; finished same as deck.
STEEL DECKING Section 05 31 00 - 3
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
B. Roof Sump Pans: Formed sheet steel, 22-gauge, minimum thickness, flat bottom, sloped sides,
recessed below roof deck surface, bearing flange, sealed watertight.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify existing conditions prior to beginning work.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Erect metal deck in accordance with SDI Design Manual and manufacturer's instructions. Align and
level.
B. On concrete and masonry surfaces provide minimum 3-inch bearing.
C. On steel supports provide minimum 2-inch bearing.
D. Fasten deck to steel support members at ends and intermediate supports per drawings.
1. Welding: Use fusion welds through weld washers.
E. At mechanically fastened male/female side laps fasten at 24 inches (600 mm) on center maximum. See
Drawings.
F. Drive mechanical sidelap connectors completely through adjacent lapped sheets; positively engage
adjacent sheets with minimum three-thread penetration.
G. Weld deck in accordance with AWS D1.3/D1.3M. See Drawings.
H. At openings between deck and walls, columns, and openings, provide sheet steel closures and angle
flashings to close openings.
I. Close openings above walls and partitions perpendicular to deck flutes with single row of foam cell
closures.
J. Place metal cant strips in position and fusion weld.
K. Position roof drain pans with flange bearing on top surface of deck. Fusion weld at each deck flute.
L. Position floor drain pans with flange bearing on top surface of deck. Fusion weld at each deck flute.
M. Immediately after welding deck and other metal components in position, coat welds, burned areas, and
damaged surface coating, with touch-up primer, zinc-rich paint.
END OF SECTION
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING Section 05 40 00 - 1
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
SECTION 05 40 00 - COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Exterior nonload-bearing steel-stud curtainwall.
2. Exterior mold-resistant sheathing and air-infiltration barriers.
3. Stud wind uplift bracing for plaster soffits.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 01 Section “Windstorm Construction Requirements” for wind load requirements and
certifications.
2. Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for masonry shelf angles and connection.
3. Division 09 Section "Portland Cement Plaster".
4. Division 07 Section “Fluid Applied Weather Barrier”.
5. Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants".
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Structural Performance: Engineer, fabricate, and erect cold-formed metal framing to withstand design
loads within limits and under conditions required. Meet Texas Windstorm Requirements in Section
01450
1. Design Loads: 35 psf wind load plus other applicable code required live and dead loads.
2. Design framing systems to withstand design loads without deflections greater than the
following:
a. Exterior Nonload-Bearing Studwall:
3. Lateral deflection of 1/360 of the wall height at plaster or stucco walls.
4. Lateral deflection of 1/600 of the wall height at masonry walls.
5. Design framing systems to provide for movement of framing members without damage or
overstressing, sheathing failure, connection failure, undue strain on fasteners and anchors, or
other detrimental effects when subject to a maximum ambient temperature change (range) of
120 deg F (67 deg C).
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections.
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING Section 05 40 00 - 2
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
B. Product data for each type of cold-formed metal framing, accessory, and product specified.
C. Shop drawings showing layout, spacings, sizes, thicknesses, and types of cold-formed metal framing,
fabrication, fastening and anchorage details, including mechanical fasteners. Show reinforcing channels,
opening framing, supplemental framing, strapping, bracing, bridging, splices, accessories, connection
details, and attachments to other units of Work.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has completed cold-formed metal framing
similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-
service performance.
B. Welding Standards: Comply with applicable provisions of AWS D1.1 "Structural Welding Code--Steel"
and AWS D1.3 "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel."
1. Certify that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes
involved and, if pertinent, has undergone recertification.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect cold-formed metal framing from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage,
and handling.
B. Store cold-formed metal framing, protect with a waterproof covering, and ventilate to avoid condensation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering cold-formed
metal framing that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide cold-formed metal framing by one of the
following:
1. Dale/Incor Industries of Florida. - CEE Stud.
2. Unimast, Inc. - U.S. Gypsum - SJ Stud.
3. Dietrien Industries, Inc.
4. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 446 (ASTM A 446M), zinc coated according to ASTM A 525
(ASTM A 525M), and as follows:
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING Section 05 40 00 - 3
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
1. "C" stud shaped; 16 gauge; 1 5/8 inch wide face and 3 5/8, 6 and 8 inch deep punched stud at
locations indicated on the Drawings.
2. Coating Designation: G 60 (Z 275).
3. Grade: Grade D, 50,000 psi (345 MPa) minimum yield strength, 12 percent elongation.
2.3 WALL FRAMING
A. Steel Studs: Manufacturer's standard galvanized C-shaped steel studs of web depths indicated, with lipped
flanges, and complying with the following:
1. Design Uncoated-Steel Thickness: 0.0598 inch (1.52 mm).
2. Flange Width: 1-5/8 inches (41 mm).
3. Web: Punched.
B. Steel Track: Manufacturer's standard galvanized U-shaped steel track, unpunched, of web depths
indicated, with straight flanges, and complying with the following:
1. Design Uncoated-Steel Thickness: Matching steel studs.
2. Flange Width: Manufacturers standard deep flange where indicated, standard flange
elsewhere.
2.4 FRAMING ACCESSORIES
A. Fabricate steel-framing accessories of the same material and finish used for framing members, with a
minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi (230 MPa).
B. Provide accessories of manufacturer's standard thickness and configuration, unless otherwise indicated,
as follows:
1. Supplementary framing.
2. Bracing, bridging, and solid blocking.
3. Web stiffeners.
4. Gusset plates.
5. Deflection track and vertical slide clips.
6. Stud kickers and girts.
7. End closures.
8. Reinforcement plates.
2.5 ANCHORS, CLIPS, AND FASTENERS
A. Steel Shapes and Clips: ASTM A 36 (ASTM A 36M), zinc coated by the hot-dip process according to
ASTM A 123.
B. Cast-in-Place Anchor Bolts and Studs: ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568, Property Class 4.6);
carbon-steel hex-head bolts and studs; carbon-steel nuts; and flat, unhardened-steel washers. Zinc
coated by the hot-dip process according to ASTM A 153.
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING Section 05 40 00 - 4
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
C. Expansion Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with capability to sustain, without
failure, a load equal to 5 times the design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted
by a qualified independent testing agency.
D. Powder-Actuated Anchors: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from
corrosion-resistant materials, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10 times the
design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 1190 conducted by a qualified independent testing
agency.
E. Mechanical Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant coated, self-drilling, self-threading steel drill screws.
1. Head Type: Low-profile head beneath sheathing, manufacturer's standard elsewhere.
F. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS standards.
2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Galvanizing Repair Paint: SSPC-Paint 20 or DOD-P-21035, with dry film containing a minimum of
94 percent zinc dust by weight.
B. Cement Grout: Portland cement, ASTM C 150, Type I; and clean, natural sand, ASTM C 404. Mix at
ratio of 1 part cement to 2-1/2 parts sand, by volume, with minimum water required for placement and
hydration.
C. Nonmetallic, Nonshrink Grout: Premixed, nonmetallic, noncorrosive, nonstaining grout containing
selected silica sands, portland cement, shrinkage-compensating agents, plasticizing and water-reducing
agents, complying with ASTM C 1107, with fluid consistency and a 30-minute working time.
D. Thermal Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I, unfaced mineral-fiber blankets produced by combining
glass or slag fibers with thermosetting resins.
2.7 GYPSUM SHEATHING
A. Gypsum Sheathing Board with Water-Resistant Core: Gypsum sheathing board consisting of
noncombustible gypsum core incorporating a water-resistant material surfaced on face, back, and long
edges with water-repellent paper bonded to the core. Comply with ASTM C 79 and requirements
indicated below:
1. Type: Regular.
2. Edge and End Configuration: Square.
3. Thickness: 1/2 inch (12.7 mm).
B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide only the following:
1. Glass-Mat Gypsum Board, Regular Type:
a. Dens-Glass Gold Exterior Sheathing; Georgia-Pacific Corp.
b. Sheetrock Brand Glass Mat Mold-Tough Panels; U.S. Gypsum Corporation
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING Section 05 40 00 - 5
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
c. No substitutions will be allowed.
C. Sheathing Fasteners: ASTM C 954, steel drill screws, Type S-12 fluted tip, a minimum of 1-1/4 inches
(32 mm) long, with organic-polymer coating or other corrosion-protective coating.
2.8 TAPES AND SEALANT
A. Sheathing Tape: Tape specifically designed and manufactured to seal joints in gypsum sheathing
against water and air infiltration, formulated with an adhesive that permanently bonds to gypsum
sheathing substrates, and as indicated below:
1. Linerless, polypropylene sheathing tape, 0.0027 inch (0.07 mm) thick, 2-1/2 inches (63 mm)
wide, composed of oriented polypropylene backing coated with permanent acrylic adhesive
formulated to adhere to gypsum sheathing surfaces.
2. Polyethylene tape, 0.025 inch (0.63 mm) thick, 3 inches (76 mm) wide, composed of
polyethylene backing coated with synthetic-rubber-based adhesive.
3. Self-adhering, glass-fiber tape, 2 inches (51 mm) wide, 10-by-10 or 10-by-20 threads per inch
(25.4 mm), of type recommended by tape manufacturer to use with siliconized emulsion
sealant in sealing joints and fasteners for gypsum sheathing, and with a history of successful
in-service use.
4. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, sheathing tapes that may be
incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
B. Silicone Emulsion Sealant: Product complying with ASTM C 834, compatible with sealant tape and
gypsum sheathing, recommended by manufacturers of both sheathing and tape for use with glass-fiber
sheathing tape and for covering exposed fasteners.
1. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Elmer's Siliconized Acrylic Latex
Caulk; Borden, Inc.
2.9 AIR-INFILTRATION BARRIER
A. Tape and waterproof all joints in sheathing.
B. Provide one of the following products at all sheathing joints:
1. Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt: ASTM D 226, Type I, No. 15 asphalt felt, unperforated.
2. Laminated polyethylene sheet, 0.003 inch (0.08 mm) thick, consisting of 2 plies of
microperforated, cross-laminated polyethylene sheets, with a water-vapor transmission rate
equaling 87.2 perms (5000 SI perms).
2.10 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate cold-formed metal framing and accessories plumb, square, true to line, and with connections
securely fastened, according to manufacturer's recommendations and the requirements of this Section.
1. Fabricate framing assemblies in jig templates.
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING Section 05 40 00 - 6
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
2. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut.
3. Fasten cold-formed metal framing members by welding or screw fastening, as standard with
fabricator. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted.
a. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality
of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.
b. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to cold-framed metal framing
manufacturer's instructions with screw penetrating joined members by not less than 3
exposed screw threads.
4. Fasten other materials to cold-formed metal framing by welding, bolting, or screw fastening,
according to manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Reinforce, stiffen, and brace framing assemblies to withstand handling, delivery, and erection stresses.
Lift fabricated assemblies to prevent damage or distortion.
C. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate assemblies to a maximum allowable tolerance variation from
plumb, level, and true to line of 1/8 inch in 10 feet (1:960) and as follows:
1. Spacing: Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm)
from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of
sheathing or other finishing materials.
2. Squareness: Fabricate each cold-formed metal framing assembly to a maximum out-of-square
tolerance of 1/8 inch (3 mm).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine supporting substrates and abutting structural framing for compliance with requirements,
including installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of cold-formed metal
framing. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Cold-formed metal framing may be shop or field fabricated for installation, or it may be field
assembled.
B. Install cold-formed metal framing and accessories plumb, square, true to line, and with connections
securely fastened, according to manufacturer's recommendations and the requirements of this Section.
1. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut.
2. Fasten cold-formed metal framing members by welding or screw fastening, as standard with
fabricator. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted.
a. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality
of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.
b. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to cold-framed metal framing
manufacturer's instructions with screw penetrating joined members by not less than 3
exposed screw threads.
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING Section 05 40 00 - 7
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
C. Install framing members in one-piece lengths, unless splice connections are indicated for track or
tension members.
D. Provide temporary bracing and leave in place until framing is permanently stabilized.
E. Do not bridge building expansion and control joints with cold-formed metal framing. Independently
frame both sides of joints.
F. Fasten reinforcement plate over web penetrations that exceed size of manufacturer's standard punched
openings.
G. Erection Tolerances: Install cold-formed metal framing to a maximum allowable tolerance variation
from plumb, level, and true to line of 1/8 inch in 10 feet (1:960) and as follows:
1. Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm) from plan
location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or
other finishing materials.
3.3 NONLOAD-BEARING CURTAINWALL INSTALLATION
A. Install continuous tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks accurately and securely anchor to
supporting structure as indicated.
B. Squarely seat studs against webs of top and bottom tracks. Fasten both flanges of studs to top and
bottom track, unless otherwise indicated. Space studs as follows:
1. Stud Spacing: 16 inches (406 mm) or closer to meet manufacturer's wind load requirements.
C. Set studs plumb, except as needed for diagonal bracing or required for nonplumb walls or warped
surfaces and similar requirements.
D. Isolate steel framing from building structure at locations indicated to prevent transfer of vertical loads
while providing lateral support.
1. Install deflection track and anchor to building structure.
2. Connect studs with vertical slide clips to continuous angles or supplementary framing
anchored to building structure.
E. Install horizontal bridging in curtainwall studs, spaced in rows not more than 48 inches (1219 mm)
apart. Fasten at each stud intersection.
1. Install additional row of horizontal bridging in curtainwall stud beneath deflection track when
curtainwall studs are not fastened to an additional top track.
2. Bridging: Cold-rolled steel channel, clip angle fastened to webs of punched studs.
F. Install miscellaneous framing and connections, including stud kickers, web stiffeners, clip angles,
continuous angles, anchors, fasteners, and stud girts, to provide a complete and stable curtainwall-
framing system.
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING Section 05 40 00 - 8
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
3.4 GYPSUM SHEATHING
A. General: Install gypsum sheathing board according to manufacturer's instructions and GA-253
"Application of Gypsum Sheathing."
B. Install square end and edged sheathing vertically with long edges parallel to, and centered over, studs.
Install solid blocking where end joints do not bear against framing sills or track. Fasten gypsum
sheathing board to perimeter framing and to each stud with self-drilling, bugle-head screws, located a
minimum of 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) from ends and edges of board units, as follows:
1. Space fasteners to comply with manufacturer's recommendations.
2. Space fasteners not more than 4 inches (102 mm) apart around perimeter at edge and end
supports and 8 inches (203 mm) apart at intermediate supports.
3.5 WIND UPLIFT BRACING
A. Install one wind uplift 3 5/8" stud brace for every (64) sixty-four square feet of new plaster soffit.
3.6 TAPE AND SEALANT APPLICATION
A. Sheathing Tape: Apply sheathing tape to joints in sheathing; overlap tape by not less than the tape
width at joint intersections.
1. For polyethylene tape, apply primer, specified by tape manufacturer, to sheathing surfaces. In
addition, apply polyethylene tape, 2 inches (50 mm) square, to completely cover each exposed
fastener.
2. For glass-fiber tape, apply approximately a 3/8-inch (9.5-mm) bead of siliconized emulsion
sealant to tapes along joints and embed sealant into tapes along their entire surface with a
trowel. In addition, apply sealant with a trowel to each exposed fastener so that fasteners are
completely covered.
3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: A qualified independent testing agency employed and paid by Owner will perform
field quality-control testing.
B. Field and shop welds will be subject to inspection and testing.
C. Testing agency will report test results promptly and in writing to Contractor and Architect.
D. Remove and replace Work that does not comply with specified requirements.
E. Additional testing will be performed to determine compliance of corrected Work with specified
requirements.
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING Section 05 40 00 - 9
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
3.8 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION
A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on fabricated and installed
cold-formed metal framing with galvanizing repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and the
manufacturer's instructions.
B. Touchup Painting: Wire brush, clean, and paint scarred areas, welds, and rust spots on fabricated and
installed prime-painted, cold-formed metal framing.
1. Touchup painted surfaces with same type of shop paint used on adjacent surfaces.
C. Protect gypsum sheathing that will be exposed to weather. Replace any materials which exhibit
evidence of water saturation or mold and mildew.
1. Protect cutouts, corners, and joints in the sheathing by filling with a flexible sealant or by
applying tape recommended by sheathing manufacturer at the time sheathing is applied.
D. Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer
to ensure that cold-formed metal framing is without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial
Completion.
END OF SECTION
METAL FABRICATIONS Section 05 50 00-1
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
SECTION 05 50 00 – METAL FABRICATIONS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Loose bearing, levelling plates and lintels.
2. Miscellaneous metal trim.
3. Overhead Door Frames and Imbeds
4. Steel plates at various locations
5. Stone table supports
6. Steel plates and tubes at exterior canopy supports
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 04 Section “Unit Masonry Systems”
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Detail fabrication and erection of each metal fabrication indicated. Include plans,
elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and
accessory items.
1. Provide templates for anchors and bolts specified for installation under other Sections.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing metal fabrications similar to those
indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as
sufficient production capacity to produce required units.
B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:
1. AWS D1.1, “Structural Welding Code – Steel”
2. Certify that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests for welding
processes involved and, if pertinent, has undergone recertification.
METAL FABRICATIONS Section 05 50 00-2
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Where metal fabrications are indicated to fit walls and other construction,
verify dimensions by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop
Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.
1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the
Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating metal fabrications without field
measurements. Coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to
established dimensions. Allow for trimming and fitting.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for metal fabrications. Furnish setting drawings, templates,
and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and
items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to
Project site in time for installation.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 METALS, GENERAL
A. Metal Surfaces, General: For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide
materials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes. Do no use materials with exposed pitting,
seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or roughness.
2.2 FERROUS METALS
A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
2.3 PAINT
A. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Division 09 “Painting”.
B. Shop Primer for Ferrous Metal: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd
primer complying with performance requirements FS TT-P-664; selected for good resistance to
normal atmospheric corrosion, compatibility with finish paint systems indicated, and capability to
provide a sound foundation for field-applied topcoats despite prolonged exposure.
C. Shop Primer for Ferrous Metal: Organic zinc-rich primer, complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and
compatible with topcoat.
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Carboline 621; Carboline Company
METAL FABRICATIONS Section 05 50 00-3
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
b. Aquapon Zinc-Rich Primer 97-670; PPG Industries, Inc.
c. Tnemec-Zinc 90-97; Tnemec Company, Inc.
D. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for regalvanizing welds in steel,
complying with SSPC-Paint 20.
E. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt mastic complying with SSPC-Paint 12, except containing
no asbestos fibers or cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.
2.4 FASTENERS
A. General: Provide Type 316 stainless steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc-plated fasteners with
coating complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5, where built into exterior walls. Select
fasteners for type, grade, and class required.
B. Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A; with hex nuts ASTM A 563;
and, where indicated, flat washers.
C. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36.
D. Machine Screws: ASME B18.6.3.
E. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1.
F. Wood Screws: Flat head, carbon steel, ASME B18.6.1.
G. Plain Washers: Round, carbon steel ASME B18.22.1.
H. Lock Washers: Helical, spring type, carbon steel, ASME B18.21.1
I. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with capability
to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times and load imposed when installed in unit
masonry and equal to four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by
testing per ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.
1. Material: Carbon-steel components zinc-plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class
Fe/Zn 5.
2. Material: Alloy Group 1 or 2 stainless-steel bolts complying with ASTM F 593 and nuts
complying with ASTM F 594.
J. Toggle Bolts: FS FF-B-588, tumble-wing type, class and style as needed.
2.5 GROUT
A. Non-shrink, Non-metallic Grout: Factory-packaged, non-staining, non-corrosive, non-gaseous
grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer
for interior and exterior applications.
METAL FABRICATIONS Section 05 50 00-4
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
2.6 FABRICATION, GENERAL
A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing
and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use
connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and
coordinated installation.
B. Shear and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs.
C. East exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch, unless otherwise indicated. Form bent
metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing
work.
D. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion
resistance of base materials.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no
roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent
surfaces.
E. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Fabricate and space
anchoring devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated loads.
F. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and
similar items.
G. Fabricate joints that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water, or provide weep
holes where water may accumulate.
H. Allow for thermal movement resulting from the maximum change (range) in ambient and surface
temperatures by preventing buckling, opening up of joints, overstressing of components, failure of
connections, and other detrimental effects. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures
of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime sky heat loss.
1. Temperature Change (Range): 120°F, ambient; 180°F, material surfaces.
I. Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight sharp
edges.
J. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed traffic surfaces.
K. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smoother, using concealed fasteners
where possible. Use exposed fasteners of type indicated or, if not indicated, Philips flat-head
(countersunk) screws or bolts. Locate joints where least conspicuous.
METAL FABRICATIONS Section 05 50 00-5
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
2.7 LOOSE BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES
A. Provide loose bearing and leveling plates for steel items bearing on masonry or concrete
construction. Drill plates to receive anchor bolts and for grouting.
B. Galvanize plates after fabrication.
2.8 LOOSE STEEL LINTELS
A. Fabricate loose H.D.G. structural steel lintels from steel angles and shapes of size indicated for
openings and recesses in masonry walls and partitions at locations indicated.
B. Weld adjoining members together to form a single unit where indicated.
C. Size loose lintels to provide bearing length at each side of openings equal to one-twelfth of clear
span, but not less than 8 inches, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Galvanize loose steel lintels located at exterior walls.
2.9 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS
A. General: Provide steel framing and supports that are not a part of structural steel framework as
necessary to complete the Work.
B. General: Provide steel framing and supports indicated and as necessary to complete the Work.
C. Fabricate units from structural steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction, unless
otherwise indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive
adjacent construction retained by framing and supports. Cut, drill, and tap units to receive
hardware, hangers, and similar items.
1. Fabricate units from slotted channel framing where indicated.
2. Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with
integrally welded steel strap anchors 1 ¼ inches wide by ¼ inch thick by 8 inches long at
24 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated.
3. Furnish inserts if units must be installed after concrete is places.
2.10 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS
A. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units from structural steel shapes, plates, and bars of profiles
shown with continuously welded joints, and smooth exposed edges. Miter corners and use
concealed field splices where possible.
B. Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages as needed to coordinate assembly and installation with
other work. Provide anchors, welded to trim, for embedding in concrete or masonry construction,
spaced not more than 6 inches from end, 6 inches from corners, and 24 inches o.c., unless
otherwise indicated.
METAL FABRICATIONS Section 05 50 00-6
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
2.11 FINISHES, GENERAL
A. Comply with NAAMM’s “Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products” for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B. Finish metal fabrications after assembly.
2.12 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES
A. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with applicable standard listed
below:
1. ASTM A 123, for galvanizing steel and iron products.
2. ASTM A 153/A 153M, for galvanizing steel and iron hardware.
B. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with minimum
requirements indicated below for SSPC surface-preparation specifications and environmental
exposure conditions of installed metal fabrications:
1. Exteriors (SSPC Zone 1B): SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, “Commercial Blast Cleaning”
2. Interiors (SSPC Zone 1A): SSPC-SP 3, “Power Tool Cleaning”
C. Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal fabrications, except those with galvanized
finishes and those to be embedded in concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing, or masonry, unless
otherwise indicated. Comply with SSPC-PA 1, “Paint Application Specification No.1” for shop
painting.
1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for
securing metal fabrications to in-place construction. Include threaded fasteners for concrete and
masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through-bolts, lag bolts, wood screws, and other connectors.
B. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal
fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in locations, alignment, and elevation; with edges
and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels.
C. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete,
masonry, or similar construction.
D. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not
to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not
weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication
and are for bolted or screwed field connections.
METAL FABRICATIONS Section 05 50 00-7
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
E. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion
resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no
roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent
surface.
F. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that will come into contact with grout,
concrete, masonry, wood or dissimilar metals with a heavy coat of bituminous paint.
3.2 SETTING BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES
A. Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen to improve
bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of plates.
B. Set bearing and leveling plates on wedges, shims, or leveling nuts. After bearing members have
been positioned and plumbed, tighten anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if
protruding, cut off flush with edge of bearing plate before packing with grout.
1. Use non-shrink grout, either metallic or non-metallic, in concealed locations where not
exposed to moisture; use non-shrink, non-metallic grout in exposed locations, unless
otherwise indicated.
2. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids remain.
3.3 INSTALLING MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS
A. General: Install framing and supports to comply with requirements of items being supported,
including manufacturers’ written instructions and requirements indicated on Shop Drawings, if
any.
B. Anchor supports for operable partitions securely to and rigidly brace from building structure.
C. Support steel girders on solid grouted masonry, concrete, or steel pipe columns. Secure girders
with anchor bolts embedded in grouted masonry or concrete or with bolts through top plates of
pipe columns.
1. Where grout space under bearing plates is indicated at girders supported on concrete or
masonry, install as specified above for setting and grouting bearing and leveling plates.
D. Install pipe columns on concrete footings with grouted baseplates. Position and grout column
baseplates as specified above for setting and grouting bearing and leveling plates.
1. Do not grout baseplates of columns supporting steel girders until girders are installed and
leveled.
METAL FABRICATIONS Section 05 50 00-8
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections and abraded
areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop painting to
comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.
1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil dry film thickness.
B. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded
areas of shop paint are specified in Division 09 Section “Painting”.
C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair
galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.
END OF SECTION
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS Section 05 52 10 - 1
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
SECTION 05 52 10 - PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Welded galvanized steel pipe and railing systems for video filming platform.
2. Railing gate for access to platform.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Definitions in ASTM E 985 for railing-related terms apply to this Section.
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: In engineering handrail and railing systems to withstand structural loads indicated, determine
allowable design working stresses of materials based on the following:
1. Cold-Formed Structural Steel: AISI "Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel
Structural Members."
B. Structural Performance of Handrails and Railing Systems: Engineer, fabricate, and install handrails
and railing systems to comply with requirements of ASTM E 985 for structural performance based on
the following:
1. Testing performed according to ASTM E 894 and E 935.
2. Structural computations.
C. Structural Performance of Handrails and Railing Systems: Engineer, fabricate, and install handrails
and railing systems to withstand the following structural loads without exceeding the allowable design
working stress of the materials for handrails, railing systems, anchors, and connections. Apply each
load to produce the maximum stress in each of the respective components comprising handrails and
railing systems.
1. Top Rail of Guardrail Systems: Capable of withstanding the following loads applied as
indicated:
a. Concentrated load of 200 lbf (890 N) applied at any point and in any direction.
b. Uniform load of 50 lbf per linear foot (730 N/m) applied horizontally and
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS Section 05 52 10 - 2
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
concurrently with uniform load of 100 lbf per linear foot (1460 N/m) applied
vertically downward.
c. Concentrated and uniform loads above need not be assumed to act concurrently.
2. Handrails Not Serving as Top Rails: Capable of withstanding the following loads applied as
indicated:
a. Concentrated load of 200 lbf (890 N) applied at any point and in any direction.
b. Uniform load of 50 lbf per linear foot (730 N/m) applied in any direction.
c. Concentrated and uniform loads above need not be assumed to act concurrently.
3. Infill Area of Guardrail Systems: Capable of withstanding a horizontal concentrated load of
200 lbf (890 N) applied to 1 sq. ft. (0.09 sq. m) at any point in the system including panels,
intermediate rails, balusters, or other elements composing the infill area. Above load need not
be assumed to act concurrently with loads on top rails of railing systems in determining stress
on guard.
D. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movement resulting from the following maximum change
(range) in ambient temperature in engineering, fabricating, and installing handrails and railing systems
to prevent buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components and connections, and other
detrimental effects. Base engineering calculation on actual surface temperatures of materials due to
both solar heat gain and nighttime sky heat loss. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F (67 deg C)
ambient 180 deg F (100 deg C) material surfaces.
E. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating metals and
other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 01
Specification Sections.
B. Product data for mechanically connected handrails and railing systems, each kind of fitting, grout,
anchoring cement, and paint products.
C. Shop drawings showing fabrication and installation of handrails and railing systems including plans,
elevations, sections, details of components, and attachments to other units of Work. For installed
handrails and railing systems indicated to comply with certain design loadings, include structural
analysis data sealed and signed by the qualified professional engineer who was responsible for their
preparation.
D. Samples for initial selection in the form of manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of colors
available for those units with factory-applied color finishes.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain handrails and railing systems of each type and material from a
single manufacturer.
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS Section 05 52 10 - 3
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
B. Engineer Qualifications: Professional engineer legally authorized to practice in the jurisdiction where
Project is located and experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated for handrails
and railing systems similar to this Project in material, design, and extent, and that have a record of
successful in-service performance.
1.7 STORAGE
A. Store handrails and railing systems inside a well-ventilated area, away from uncured concrete and
masonry and protected from weather, moisture, soiling, abrasion, extreme temperatures, and humidity.
1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Where handrails and railing systems are indicated to fit to other construction,
check actual dimensions of other construction by accurate field measurements before fabrication; show
recorded measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction
progress to avoid delaying the Work. Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the
Work, guarantee dimensions and proceed with fabricating handrails and railing systems without field
measurements. Coordinate other construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to
guaranteed dimensions.
1.9 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Sequence and coordinate installation of wall handrails as follows:
1. Mount handrails only on completed walls. Do not support handrails temporarily by any means
not satisfying structural performance requirements.
2. Mount handrails on plaster or gypsum board assemblies only where reinforced to receive
anchors and where the location of concealed reinforcements has been clearly marked for
benefit of Installer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Stainless Steel Pipe and Tube Railings:
1. Supplier: S.C. Welding – (361) 446-1992
2. Other Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. Blum: Julius Blum & Co.
2.2 METALS
A. General: Provide metals free from surface blemishes where exposed to view in the finished unit.
Exposed-to-view surfaces exhibiting pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, or other
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS Section 05 52 10 - 4
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
imperfections on finished units are not acceptable.
B. Stainless Steel Welded Pipe Handrail:
1. Handrail shall be constructed of 1-1/2-inch nominal N.S.P. 316 stainless steel pipe. All
connector fittings shall be welded. Finish to be polished and clear anodized after fabrication.
C. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of the same material and finish as supported
rails, unless otherwise indicated.
2.3 WELDING MATERIALS, FASTENERS, AND ANCHORS
A. Welding Electrodes and Filler Metal: Provide type and alloy of filler metal and electrodes as
recommended by producer of metal to be welded and as required for color match, strength, and
compatibility in fabricated items.
B. Fasteners for Anchoring Railings to Other Construction: Select fasteners of the type, grade, and class
required to produce connections that are suitable for anchoring railings to other types of construction
indicated and capable of withstanding design loadings.
1. For steel railings and fittings, use plated fasteners complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn
25 for electrodeposited zinc coating.
C. Fasteners for Interconnecting Railing Components: Use fasteners of same basic metal as the fastened
metal, unless otherwise indicated. Do not use metals that are corrosive or incompatible with materials
joined.
1. Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting railing components and their attachment to
other work, except where otherwise indicated.
2. Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting railing components and their attachment to
other work, except where exposed fasteners are unavoidable or are the standard fastening
method for handrail and railing system indicated.
3. Provide Phillips flat-head machine screws for exposed fasteners, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Cast-in-Place and Post-installed Anchors: Anchors of type indicated below, fabricated from corrosion-
resistant materials, capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load imposed
when installed in unit masonry and equal to 4 times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as
determined by testing per ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified, independent testing agency.
1. Cast-in-place anchors.
2. Expansion anchors.
2.4 GROUT AND ANCHORING CEMENT
A. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Premixed, factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous
grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for
interior and exterior applications.
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS Section 05 52 10 - 5
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
B. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated in the
Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
C. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
1. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grouts:
a. B-6 Construction Grout; W.R. Bonsal Co.
b. Diamond-Crete Grout; Concrete Service Materials Co.
c. Supreme; Cormix Construction Chemicals.
d. Sure-grip High Performance Grout; Dayton Superior Corp.
e. Euco N-S Grout; Euclid Chemical Co.
f. Five Star Grout; Five Star Products.
g. Vibropruf #11; Lambert Corp.
h. Crystex; L & M Construction Chemicals, Inc.
i. Masterflow 928 and 713; Master Builders Technologies, Inc.
j. Sealtight 588 Grout; W.R. Meadows, Inc.
k. Sonogrout 14; Sonneborn Building Products--ChemRex, Inc.
l. Kemset; The Spray-Cure Company.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate handrails and railing systems to comply with requirements indicated for design,
dimensions, details, finish, and member sizes, including wall thickness of hollow members, post
spacings, and anchorage, but not less than those required to support structural loads.
B. Assemble handrails and railing systems in the shop to the greatest extent possible to minimize field
splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations.
Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. Use connections that maintain
structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.
C. Form changes in direction of members as follows:
1. As detailed.
D. Form simple and compound curves by bending pipe in jigs to produce uniform curvature for each
repetitive configuration required; maintain cylindrical cross section of pipe throughout entire bend
without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of pipe.
E. Welded Connections (Steel Pipe Railings): Fabricate handrails and railing systems for connection of
members by welding. For connections made during fabrication, weld corners and seams continuously
to comply with the following:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion
resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. At tee and cross intersections, cope ends of intersecting members to fit contour of pipe or tube
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS Section 05 52 10 - 6
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
to which end is joined, and weld all around.
5. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so that no
roughness shows after finishing and welded surface matches contours of adjoining surfaces.
F. Welded Connections (Stainless Steel Pipe Railings): Fabricate handrails and railing systems by
connecting members with railing manufacturer's standard concealed mechanical fasteners and fittings,
unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate members and fittings to produce flush, smooth, rigid, hairline
joints.
G. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide manufacturer's standard wall brackets, flanges,
miscellaneous fittings, and anchors to interconnect handrail and railing system members to other
construction.
H. Provide inserts and other anchorage devices to connect handrails and railing systems to concrete or
masonry work. Fabricate anchorage devices capable of withstanding loads imposed by handrails and
railing systems. Coordinate anchorage devices with supporting structure.
1. For railing posts set in concrete, provide preset sleeves of steel, not less than 6 inches (150
mm) long with inside dimensions not less than 1/2 inch (12 mm) greater than outside
dimensions of post, and steel plate forming bottom closure.
I. For removable railing posts, fabricate slip-fit sockets from steel pipe whose inside diameter is sized for
a close fit with posts and to limit deflection of post without lateral load, measured at top, to not more
than 1/12 of post height. Provide socket covers designed and fabricated to resist accidental
dislodgement.
1. Provide chain with eye, snap hook, and staple across gaps formed by removable railing
sections at locations indicated. Fabricate from same metal as railings.
J. Shear and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs from exposed cut edges.
K. Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch (1 mm), unless otherwise indicated. Form
bent-metal corners to the smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise
impairing work.
L. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap components, as indicated, to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar
items.
M. Provide weepholes, or another means to evacuate entrapped water, in hollow sections of railing
members that are exposed to exterior or to moisture from condensation or other sources.
N. Fabricate joints that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water.
O. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails, unless otherwise indicated.
P. Toe Boards: Where indicated, provide toe boards at railings around openings and at the edge of open-
sided floors and platforms. Fabricate to dimensions and details indicated.
Q. Fillers: Provide steel sheet or plate fillers, of thickness and size indicated or required to support
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS Section 05 52 10 - 7
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
structural loads of handrails, where needed to transfer wall bracket loads through wall finishes to
structural supports. Size fillers to suit wall finish thicknesses to produce adequate bearing to prevent
bracket rotation and overstressing substrate.
2.6 FINISHES, GENERAL
A. Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual" for recommendations relative to applying and
designating finishes.
B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary
protective covering prior to shipment.
C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable
if they are within one half of the range of approved samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece
are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the
range of approved samples and they are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
D. Provide exposed fasteners with finish matching appearance, including color and texture, of handrails
and railing systems.
2.7 STAINLESS STEEL FINISHES
A. Fill vent and drain holes that will be exposed in the finished Work, unless indicated to remain as weep
holes, by plugging with zinc solder and filing off smooth.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Coordinate setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions for installing anchorages,
such as sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and miscellaneous items having integral anchors, that are
to be embedded in concrete as masonry construction. Coordinate delivery of such items to Project site.
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form tight, hairline joints.
B. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing handrails
and railing systems. Set handrails and railing systems accurately in location, alignment, and elevation,
measured from established lines and levels and free from rack.
1. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of handrails and railing components that have been
coated or finished after fabrication and are intended for field connection by mechanical or
other means without further cutting or fitting.
2. Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 1/4 inch in 12 feet (2 mm in 1 m).
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS Section 05 52 10 - 8
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
3. Align rails so that variations from level for horizontal members and from parallel with rake of
steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 1/4 inch in 12 feet (2 mm in 1 m).
C. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion
resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so that no
roughness shows after finishing, and welded surface matches contours of adjoining surfaces.
D. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that will come into contact with grout,
concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals with a heavy coat of bituminous paint.
E. Adjust handrails and railing systems prior to anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints.
Space posts at interval indicated but not less than that required by design loadings.
F. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for
securing handrails and railing systems and for properly transferring loads to in-place construction.
3.3 RAILING CONNECTIONS
A. Welded Connections: Use fully welded joints for permanently connecting railing components by
welding. Cope or butt components to provide 100 percent contact, or use fittings designed for this
purpose.
B. Expansion Joints: Install expansion joints at locations indicated but not further apart than required to
accommodate thermal movement. Provide slip-joint internal sleeve extending 2 inches (50 mm)
beyond joint on either side; fasten internal sleeve securely to one side; locate joint within 6 inches (150
mm) of post.
3.4 ANCHORING POSTS
A. Anchor posts in concrete with pipe sleeves preset and anchored into concrete. After posts have been
inserted into sleeves, solidly fill annular space between post and sleeve with the following anchoring
material, mixed and placed to comply with anchoring material manufacturer's directions.
1. Nonshrink, nonmetallic grout.
B. Leave anchorage joint exposed, wipe off surplus anchoring material, and leave 1/8-inch (3-mm)
buildup, sloped away from post.
C. Anchor posts to metal surfaces with oval flanges, angle type, or floor type as required by conditions,
connected to posts and to metal supporting members as follows:
1. For stainless steel pipe railings, weld flanges to post and bolt to metal supporting surfaces.
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS Section 05 52 10 - 9
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
D. Install removable railing sections where indicated in slip-fit metal sockets cast into concrete.
Accurately locate sockets to match post spacing.
3.5 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Clean the following metals by washing thoroughly with clean water and soap, followed by rinsing with
clean water.
3.6 PROTECTION
A. Protect finishes of handrails and railing systems from damage during construction period with
temporary protective coverings approved by railing manufacturer. Remove protective coverings at
time of Substantial Completion.
B. Restore finishes damaged during installation and construction period so that no evidence remains of
correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the shop; make required
alterations and refinish entire unit or provide new units.
END OF SECTION
ROUGH CARPENTRY Section 06 10 00 - 1
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
SECTION 06 10 00 - ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Framing with dimension lumber.
2. Wood furring, grounds, nailers, and blocking.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 05 Section “Cold-Formed Metal Framing” for exterior soffit and sheathing.
2. Division 06 Section 06 20 00 “Finish Carpentry” for non-structural carpentry items exposed to
view and not specified in another Section.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Rough Carpentry: Carpentry work not specified in other Sections and not exposed, unless otherwise
specified.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 01
Specification Sections.
B. Product Data for the following products:
1. Air-infiltration barriers
2. Metal framing anchors
3. Construction adhesives
C. Material certificates for dimension lumber specified to comply with minimum allowable unit stresses.
Indicate species and grade selected for each use and design values approved by the American Lumber
Standards Committee's (ALSC) Board of Review.
D. Wood treatment data as follows, including chemical treatment manufacturer's instructions for handling,
storing, installing, and finishing treated materials:
1. For each type of preservative-treated wood product, include certification by treating plant
stating type of preservative solution and pressure process used, net amount of preservative
ROUGH CARPENTRY Section 06 10 00 - 2
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
retained, and compliance with applicable standards.
2. For waterborne-treated products, include statement that moisture content of treated materials
was reduced to levels indicated before shipment to Project Site.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: To qualify for approval, an independent testing agency must
demonstrate to Architect's satisfaction, based on evaluation of agency-submitted criteria conforming to
ASTM E 699, that it has the experience and capability to satisfactorily conduct the testing indicated
without delaying the Work.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Keep materials under cover and dry. Protect from weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces.
Stack lumber, plywood, and other panels. Provide for air circulation within and around stacks and
under temporary coverings.
1. For lumber and plywood pressure treated with waterborne chemicals, place spacers between
each bundle to provide air circulation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products
that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Wood-Preservative Treated Materials:
a. Baxter: J.H. Baxter Co.
b. Chemical Specialties, Inc.
c. Continental Wood Preservers, Inc.
d. Hickson Corp.
e. Hoover Treated Wood Products, Inc.
f. Osmose Wood Preserving, Inc.
2. Air-Infiltration Barriers
a. Anthony Industries, Inc.; Simplex Products Division.
b. Celotex Corporation (The); Building Products Division.
c. DuPont Company; Fibers Department.
d. Parsec, Inc.
e. Raven Industries, Inc.
f. Reemay, Inc.
g. Sto-Cote Products, Inc.
3. Metal Framing Anchors:
a. Cleveland Steel Specialty Co.
ROUGH CARPENTRY Section 06 10 00 - 3
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
b. Harlen Metal Products, Inc.
c. Silver Metal Products, Inc.
d. Simpson Strong-Tie Company, Inc.
e. Southeastern Metals Manufacturing Co., Inc.
2.2 LUMBER, GENERAL
A. Lumber Standards: Comply with DOC PS 20, "American Softwood Lumber Standard," and with applicable
grading rules of inspection agencies certified by ALSC's Board of Review.
B. Inspection Agencies: Inspection agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the
following:
1. SPIB - Southern Pine Inspection Bureau.
C. Grade Stamps: Provide lumber with each piece factory marked with grade stamp of inspection agency
evidencing compliance with grading rule requirements and identifying grading agency, grade, species,
moisture content at time of surfacing, and mill.
1. For exposed lumber, furnish pieces with grade stamps applied to ends or back of each piece, or
omit grade stamps and provide grade-compliance certificates issued by inspection agency.
D. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are minimum dressed sizes for dry lumber.
1. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Provide dry lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing for 2-inch
nominal (38-mm actual) thickness or less, unless otherwise indicated.
2.3 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED MATERIALS
A. General: Where lumber or plywood is indicated as preservative treated or is specified to be treated, comply
with applicable requirements of AWPA C2 (lumber) and AWPA C9 (plywood). Mark each treated item
with the Quality Mark Requirements of an inspection agency approved by ALSC's Board of Review.
1. Do not use chemicals containing chromium or arsenic.
2. For exposed items indicated to receive stained finish, use chemical formulations that do not bleed
through, contain colorants, or otherwise adversely affect finishes.
B. Pressure treat aboveground items with waterborne preservatives to a minimum retention of 0.25 lb/cu. ft.
(4.0 kg/cu. m). After treatment, kiln-dry lumber and plywood to a maximum moisture content of 19 and 15
percent, respectively. Treat indicated items and the following:
1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar members in
connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing.
2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping, and similar concealed members in contact with
masonry or concrete.
3. Wood framing members less than 18 inches (460 mm) above grade.
ROUGH CARPENTRY Section 06 10 00 - 4
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
C. Pressure treat wood members in contact with ground or freshwater with waterborne preservatives to a
minimum retention of 0.40 lb/cu. ft. (6.4 kg/cu. m).
D. Complete fabrication of treated items before treatment, where possible. If cut after treatment, apply field
treatment complying with AWPA M4 to cut surfaces. Inspect each piece of lumber or plywood after drying
and discard damaged or defective pieces.
2.4 DIMENSION LUMBER
A. General: Provide dimension lumber of grades indicated according to the ALSC National Grading Rule
(NGR) provisions of the inspection agency indicated.
1. Grade: Construction, Stud, or No. 3.
2. Species: Southern pine; SPIB.
B. Framing Other than Non-Load-Bearing Partitions: Provide framing of the following grade and species:
1. Grade: No. 2.
2. Species: Mixed southern pine; SPIB.
C. Other Framing Not Listed Above: Provide the following grades and species:
1. Grade: Construction or No. 2.
2. Species: Southern pine; SPIB.
2.5 BOARDS
A. Concealed Boards: Where boards will be concealed by other work, provide lumber with 19 percent
maximum moisture content and of following species and grade:
1. Species and Grade: Mixed southern pine, No. 2 per SPIB rules.
2.6 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER
A. General: Provide lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including rooftop equipment
curbs and support bases, cant strips, bucks, nailers, blocking, furring, grounds, stripping, and similar
members.
B. Fabricate miscellaneous lumber from dimension lumber of sizes indicated and into shapes shown.
C. Moisture Content: 19 percent maximum for lumber items not specified to receive wood preservative
treatment.
D. Grade: For dimension lumber sizes, provide No. 2 or Standard grade lumber per ALSC's NGRs of any
species. For board-size lumber, provide No. 2 Common grade per NELMA, NLGA, or WWPA; No. 2
grade per SPIB; or Standard grade per NLGA, WCLIB or WWPA of any species.
ROUGH CARPENTRY Section 06 10 00 - 5
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
2.7 CONCEALED, PERFORMANCE-RATED STRUCTURAL-USE PANELS
A. General: Where structural-use panels are indicated for the following concealed types of applications,
provide APA-performance-rated panels complying with requirements designated under each application for
grade, span rating, exposure durability classification, and edge detail (where applicable).
1. Thickness: Provide panels meeting requirements specified but not less than thickness indicated.
2. Span Ratings: Provide panels with span ratings required to meet "Code Plus" provisions of APA
Form No. E30, "APA Design/Construction Guide: Residential & Commercial."
2.8 STRUCTURAL-USE PANELS FOR BACKING
A. Plywood Backing Panels: For mounting electrical or telephone equipment, provide fire-retardant-
treated plywood panels with grade, C-D Plugged Exposure 1, in thickness indicated or, if not otherwise
indicated, not less than 15/32 inch (11.9 mm) thick.
2.9 FIBROUS-FELTED BOARD
A. Hardboard Underlayment: ANSI/AHA A135.4, Class 4 (Service), Surface S1S; with back side sanded
to produce boards with uniform thickness of 0.215 or 0.200 inch (5.5 or 5 mm), as standard with
manufacturer, plus or minus 0.005 inch (0.13 mm).
1. Class 1 (regular density), size as follows:
a. Size: 1/4 inch thick. Apply 90 to 3/4" tongue and groove plywood underlayment.
2.10 AIR-INFILTRATION BARRIER
A. Asphalt-saturated organic felt complying with ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 30 asphalt felt), unperforated.
2.11 FASTENERS
A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this
Article for material and manufacture.
1. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, or in area of high relative
humidity, provide fasteners with a hot-dip zinc coating per ASTM A 153 or of Type 304
stainless steel.
B. Nails, Wire, Brads, and Staples: FS FF-N-105.
C. Power-Driven Fasteners: CABO NER-272.
D. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1.
E. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1. (ASME B18.2.3.8M)
ROUGH CARPENTRY Section 06 10 00 - 6
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
F. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568, Property Class 4.6); with
ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers.
2.12 METAL FRAMING ANCHORS
A. General: Provide galvanized steel framing anchors of structural capacity, type, and size indicated and
as follows:
1. Research or Evaluation Reports: Provide products for which model code research or
evaluation reports exist that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and that evidence
compliance of metal framing anchors for application indicated with building code in effect for
Project.
2. Allowable Design Loads: Provide products with allowable design loads, as published by
manufacturer, that meet or exceed those indicated. Manufacturer's published values shall be
determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and demonstrated by
comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency.
B. Galvanized Steel Sheet: Hot-dip, zinc-coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653, G60
(ASTM A 653M, Z180) coating designation; structural, commercial, or lock-forming quality, as
standard with manufacturer for type of anchor indicated.
C. Hold-Downs: Brackets for bolting to wall studs and securing to foundation walls with anchor bolts or
to other hold-downs with threaded rods and designed with first of 2 bolts placed 7 bolt diameters from
reinforced base.
2.13 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Adhesives for Field Gluing Panels to Framing: Formulation complying with APA AFG-01 that is
approved for use with type of construction panel indicated by both adhesive and panel manufacturers.
B. Water-Repellent Preservative: NWWDA-tested and -accepted formulation containing 3-iodo-2-
propynyl butyl carbonate (IPBC) as its active ingredient.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Discard units of material with defects that impair quality of rough carpentry and that are too small to
use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement.
B. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted.
C. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as required for accurate fit. Correlate
location of furring, nailers, blocking, grounds, and similar supports to allow attachment of other
construction.
ROUGH CARPENTRY Section 06 10 00 - 7
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
D. Apply field treatment complying with AWPA M4 to cut surfaces of preservative-treated lumber and
plywood.
E. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying
with the following:
1. CABO NER-272 for power-driven staples, P-nails, and allied fasteners.
2. Published requirements of metal framing anchor manufacturer.
3. "Recommended Nailing Schedule" of referenced framing standard and with AFPA's "National
Design Specifications for Wood Construction."
4. "Table 1705.1--Fastening Schedule," of the Standard Building Code.
F. Use common wire nails, unless otherwise indicated. Use finishing nails for finish work. Select
fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or
will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without
splitting wood; predrill as required.
G. Use hot-dip galvanized or stainless-steel nails where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground
contact, or in area of high relative humidity.
H. Countersink nail heads on exposed carpentry work and fill holes with wood filler.
3.2 WOOD GROUNDS, NAILERS, BLOCKING, AND SLEEPERS
A. Install wood grounds, nailers, blocking, and sleepers where shown and where required for screeding or
attaching other work. Form to shapes shown and cut as required for true line and level of attached work.
Coordinate locations with other work involved.
B. Attach to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces, unless otherwise
indicated. Build into masonry during installation of masonry work. Where possible, anchor to formwork
before concrete placement.
C. Install permanent grounds of dressed, preservative-treated, key-beveled lumber not less than 1-1/2 inches
(38 mm) wide and of thickness required to bring face of ground to exact thickness of finish material.
Remove temporary grounds when no longer required.
3.3 WOOD FRAMING, GENERAL
A. Framing Standard: Comply with AFPA's "Manual for Wood Frame Construction," unless otherwise
indicated.
B. Framing with Engineered Wood Products: Install engineered wood products to comply with manufacturer's
written instructions.
C. Install framing members of size and at spacing indicated.
D. Do not splice structural members between supports.
ROUGH CARPENTRY Section 06 10 00 - 8
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District September 1, 2018
E. Firestop concealed spaces of wood-framed walls and partitions at each floor level and at ceiling line of top
story. Where firestopping is not inherent in framing system used, provide closely fitted wood blocks of 2-
inch nominal- (38-mm actual-) thickness lumber of same width as framing members.
END OF SECTION
FINISH CARPENTRY Section 06 20 00 - 1
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
SECTION 06 20 00 – FINISH CARPENTRY
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Stain grade wood, ceilings, and trim at designated areas - #1 T&G yellow pine; 1x6;
stained at interior and at designated exterior locations.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 06 Section “Rough Carpentry” for structural wood decking and framing exposed
to view.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the General Conditions of the Contract and
Division 01 Specification Sections.
B. Product Data for each type of factory-fabricated product and process specified, including details of
construction relative to materials, dimensions of individual components, profiles, textures, and
colors.
C. Samples for verification of the following:
1. Lumber and panel products with nonfactory-applied finish, 50 sq. in. (300 sq. cm) for
lumber and 8 by 10 inches for panels for each species and cut, with one-half of exposed
surface finished.
D. Material test reports from a qualified independent testing agency indicating and interpreting test
results relative to compliance of fire-retardant-treated wood products with requirements indicated.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who has completed finish carpentry
similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of
successful service performance.
FINISH CARPENTRY Section 06 20 00 - 2
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Delivery and Storage: Keep materials under cover and dry. Protect against exposure to weather
and contact with damp or wet surfaces. Stack lumber, plywood, and other panels. Provide for air
circulation within and around stacks and under temporary coverings.
B. Do not deliver interior finish carpentry until environmental conditions meet requirements specified
for installation areas. If finish carpentry must be stored in other than installation areas, store only
where environmental conditions meet requirements specified for installation areas.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install interior finish carpentry until building is
enclosed and weatherproof, wet-work in space is completed and nominally dry, and HVAC system
is operation and will maintain temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels through the
remainder of construction period.
B. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installing exterior finish carpentry only when existing and
forecasted weather conditions will permit work to be performed according to manufacturer’s
recommendations and warranty requirements and at least one coat of specified finish to be applied
without exposure to rain, snow or dampness.
PART 2 – PRODUCT
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufactures offering
products that may be incorporated in the Work are included.
2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Lumber Standards: Comply with DOC PS 20, “American Softwood Lumber Standard,” for lumber
and with applicable grading rules of inspection agencies certified by American Lumber Standards
Committee Board of Review.
B. Inspection Agencies: Inspection agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include
the following:
1. NHLA – National Hardwood Lumber Association.
2. SPIB – Southern Pine Inspection Bureau.
C. Grade Stamps: Provide lumber with each piece factory marked with grade stamp of inspection
agency evidencing compliance with grading rule requirements and identifying grading agency,
grade, species, moisture content at time of surfacing and mill.
FINISH CARPENTRY Section 06 20 00 - 3
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
1. For exposed lumber, furnish pieces with grade stamps applied to ends or back of each
piece or omit grade stamps entirely and provide certificates of grade compliance issued
by inspection agency.
2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Fasteners for Interior Finish Carpentry: Nails, screws, and other anchoring devices of type, size,
material, and finish required for application indicated to provide secure attachment, concealed
where possible.
1. Where finish carpentry materials are exposed in areas of high humidity, provide fasteners
and anchorages with hot-dip galvanized coating complying with ASTM A 153.
B. Glue: Aliphatic- or phenolic-resin wood glue recommended by manufacturer for general carpentry
use.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of specified inspection agencies and
manufacturer’s recommendations for moisture content of finish carpentry on relative humidity
conditions existing during time of fabrication and in installation areas.
B. Fabricate finish carpentry to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated.
1. Back out or kerf backs of the following members, except members with ends exposed in
finished work:
a. Interior standing and running trim, except shore mold and crown mold.
2. Ease edges of lumber less than 1 inch in nominal thickness to 1/16-inch radius.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting installation and performance of finish carpentry. Do no
proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to application.
B. Condition finish carpentry to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas before
installation, for a minimum of 24 hours unless longer conditioning is recommended by
manufacturer.
FINISH CARPENTRY Section 06 20 00 - 4
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Do not use finish carpentry materials that are unsound, warped, improperly treated or finished,
inadequately seasoned, or too small to fabricate with proper jointing arrangements.
1. Do not use manufactured units with defective surfaces, sizes, or patterns.
B. Install finish carpentry plumb, level, true and aligned with adjacent materials, Use concealed
shims where required for alignment.
1. Scribe and cut finish carpentry to fit adjoining work. Refinish and seal cuts as
recommended by manufacturer.
2. Countersink nails, fill surface flush, and sand where face nailing is unavoidable.
3. Install to tolerance of ⅛-inch in 96-inches for plumb and level. Install adjoining finish
carpentry with 1/32-inch maximum offset for flush installation and 1/16-inch maximum
offset for reveal installation.
4. Coordinate finish carpentry with materials and systems in or adjacent to standing and
running trim and rails. Provide cutouts for mechanical and electrical items that penetrate
exposed surfaces of trim and rails.
C. Finish according to specified requirements.
D. Refer to Division 08 Sections for final flashing of finish carpentry.
3.4 STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM INSTALLATION
A. Install with minimum number of joints practical, using full-length pieces from maximum lengths
of lumber available. Do not use pieces less than 24 inches long, except where necessary. Stagger
joints in adjacent and related standing and running trim. Cope at returns and miter at corners to
produce tight-fitting joints with full-surface contact throughout length of joint. Use scarf joints for
end-to-end joints. Plane backs of casings to provided uniform thickness across joints, if required.
1. Match color and grain pattern across joints.
2. Install trim after gypsum board joint finishing operations are completed.
3. Drill pilot holes in hardwood before fastening to prevent splitting. Fasten to prevent
movement or warping. Countersink fastener heads on exposed carpentry work and fill
holes.
4. Fit exterior joints to exclude water. Apply flat grain lumber with bark side exposed to
weather.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Repair damaged or defective finish carpentry where possible to eliminate functional or visual
defects. Where not possible to repair, replace finish carpentry. Adjust joinery for uniform
appearance.
FINISH CARPENTRY Section 06 20 00 - 5
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
3.6 CLEANING
A. Clean finish carpentry on exposed and semi-exposed surfaces. Touch-up factory-applied finishes
to restore damaged or soiled areas.
3.7 PROTECTION
A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure finish carpentry is without damage or
deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK Section 06 40 23 - 1
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
SECTION 06 40 23 - INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Laminate-clad cabinets and shelving (plastic-covered casework).
2. Trophy Cases.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division0 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for exposed on concealed framing and for furring,
blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing interior woodwork.
2. Division 08 Section "Flush Wood Doors" for doors specified by reference to architectural
woodwork standards.
3. Division 09 Section "Painting" for field finishing of installed interior architectural woodwork.
4. Division 06 Section “Solid Surface Fabrication” for library circulation desk tops and splash.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Interior architectural woodwork includes wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for
installing woodwork items unless concealed within other construction prior to woodwork installation.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections.
B. Product data for each type of product and process specified and incorporated into items of
architectural woodwork during fabrication, finishing, and installation.
C. Shop drawings showing location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale details,
attachment devices, and other components.
1. Show veneer leaves with dimensions, grain direction, exposed face, and an identification
number indicated for each leaf. Identification number shall indicate the flitch and the
sequence within the flitch for each leaf.
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK Section 06 40 23 - 2
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
D. Samples for initial selection of the following in the form of manufacturer's color charts consisting of
actual units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for
each type of material indicated.
1. Shop-applied transparent finishes.
2. Shop-applied opaque finishes.
3. Plastic laminates.
4. Solid surfaces.
E. Samples for verification of the following:
1. Lumber with or for transparent finish, 50 sq. in., for each species and cut, finished on one side
and one edge.
2. Veneer leaves representative of and selected from flitches to be used for transparent-finished
woodwork.
3. Wood-veneer-faced panel products, with or for transparent finish, 8 by 10 inches, for each
species and cut. Include at least one face-veneer seam and finish one-half of face as specified.
4. Lumber and panel products with shop-applied opaque finish, 8 by 10 inches for panels and 50
sq. in. for lumber, for each finish system and color, with one-half of exposed surface finished.
5. Exposed cabinet hardware, one unit for each type and finish.
6. Warranty – Operations and care guide for casework.
F. Product certificates signed by woodwork fabricator certifying that products comply with specified
requirements.
G. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate
their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and
addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabricator Qualifications: Firm experienced in producing architectural woodwork similar to that
indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient
production capacity to produce required units without delaying the Work.
B. Installer Qualifications: Arrange for interior architectural woodwork installation by a firm that can
demonstrate successful experience in installing architectural woodwork items similar in type and
quality to those required for this Project.
C. Single-Source Responsibility for Fabrication and Installation: Engage a qualified woodworking firm
to assume undivided responsibility for fabricating, finishing, and installing woodwork specified in
this Section.
D. Quality Standard: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with the following standard:
1. AWI Quality Standard: "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards" of the Architectural
Woodwork Institute for grades of interior architectural woodwork, construction, finishes, and
other requirements.
a. Provide AWI Certification Labels or Certificates of Compliance indicating that
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK Section 06 40 23 - 3
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
woodwork meets requirements of grades specified.
E. Warranty – Provide a one (1) year warranty for casework and millwork. Provide lifetime warranty
for Blum Metabox Hardware.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect woodwork during transit, delivery, storage, and handling to prevent damage, soilage, and
deterioration.
B. Do not deliver woodwork until painting and similar operations that could damage, soil, or deteriorate
woodwork have been completed in installation areas. If woodwork must be stored in other than
installation areas, store only in areas whose environmental conditions meet requirements specified in
"Project Conditions."
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet-work
is completed, and HVAC system is operating and will maintain temperature and relative humidity at
occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.
B. Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to be fitted to other construction, check actual
dimensions of other construction by accurate field measurements before fabrication, and show
recorded measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction
progress to avoid delaying the Work.
1. Verify locations of concealed framing, blocking, reinforcements, and furring that support
woodwork by accurate field measurements before being enclosed. Record measurements on
final shop drawings.
1.8 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units
of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that interior architectural woodwork can be supported
and installed as indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Hoffman Millwork; Corpus Christi, Texas
B. Aris Designs; Corpus Christi, Texas
C. Goebel Woodwork; Cuero, Texas
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK Section 06 40 23 - 4
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of the AWI quality standard for each type
of woodwork and quality grade indicated and, where the following products are part of interior
woodwork, with requirements of the referenced product standards that apply to product
characteristics indicated:
1. Softwood Plywood: PS 1.
2. Hardwood Plywood and Face Veneers: HPVA HP-1.
B. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated, or if not indicated, as
required by woodwork quality standard.
1. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide high-pressure decorative
laminates by one of the following:
a. Formica Corporation.
b. Laminart.
c. Nevamar Corp.
d. Pionite Plastics Corp.
e. Westinghouse Electric Corp.; Specialty Products Div.
f. WilsonArt International
C. Adhesive for Bonding Plastic Laminate: Contact cement.
2.3 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A. General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural cabinets,
except for items specified in Division 8 Section "Door Hardware."
B. Cabinet Hardware Schedule: Refer to schedule at end of this Section for cabinet hardware required
for architectural cabinets.
C. Hardware Standard: Comply with BHMA A156.9 for items indicated by reference to BHMA
numbers or referenced to this standard.
D. Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with
BHMA A156.18 for BHMA code number indicated.
1. Satin Chromium Plated: BHMA 626 for brass or bronze base; BHMA 652 for steel base.
E. For concealed hardware provide manufacturer's standard finish that complies with product class
requirements of BHMA A156.9.
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK Section 06 40 23 - 5
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
2.4 INSTALLATION MATERIALS
A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln dried to less than
15 percent moisture content.
B. Screws: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each use. Comply with ASME B18.6.1
for applicable requirements.
C. Nails: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each use. Comply with FS FF-N-105 for
applicable requirements.
D. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage.
Provide nonferrous metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside face of exterior walls
and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Provide toothed steel or lead expansion bolt
devices for drilled-in-place anchors.
2.5 FABRICATION, GENERAL
A. Interior Woodwork Grade: Provide interior woodwork complying with the referenced quality
standard and of the following grade:
1. Grade: Custom.
B. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for wood
moisture content in relation to relative humidity conditions existing during time of fabrication and in
installation areas.
C. Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Ease edges to radius indicated for
the following:
1. Corners of cabinets and edges of solid-wood (lumber) members 3/4 inch thick or less: 1/16
inch.
2. Edges of rails and similar members more than 3/4 inch thick: 1/8 inch.
D. Complete fabrication, including assembly, finishing, and hardware application, before shipment to
Project site to maximum extent possible. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment
and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming,
and fitting.
E. Shop-cut openings, to maximum extent possible, to receive hardware, appliances, plumbing fixtures,
electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in
diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Smooth edges of cutouts and, where
located in countertops and similar exposures, seal edges with a water-resistant coating.
2.6 LAMINATE-CLAD CABINETS (PLASTIC-COVERED CASEWORK)
A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 400 requirements for laminate-clad cabinets.
1. Grade: Custom.
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK Section 06 40 23 - 6
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
B. AWI Type of Cabinet Construction: Flush overlay.
C. Core: Material for cabinet construction to be ¾ inch industrial particleboard except ¾ inch plywood
at all sink cabinets. ¼ inch MDR for backs, shelves over 36 inches to be 1 inch thick. Cabinet bases
to be ladder type separately constructed with Type I glue bond – No particle board.
D. Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces: High-pressure decorative laminate complying with the
following requirements:
1. Horizontal Surfaces Other than Tops: GP-50, 0.050-inch nominal thickness.
2. Postformed Surfaces: PF-42, 0.042-inch nominal thickness.
3. Vertical Surfaces: .030 inch nominal VG - .030.
4. Edges: Matching PVC or HPL .030 inch minimum nominal thickness.
E. Materials for Semi-exposed Surfaces: Provide surface materials indicated below:
1. Surfaces Other than Drawer Bodies: High-pressure decorative laminate, Grade GP-28.
2. Doors and Drawers to be balanced construction with HPL liner.
F. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures of
exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements:
1. Match Architect's sample.
2. Match color, pattern, and finish indicated by reference to laminate manufacturer's standard
designations for these characteristics.
3. Provide Architect's selections from laminate manufacturer's full range of colors and finishes
in the following categories:
a. Solid colors.
b. Wood grains.
c. Patterns.
2.7 COUNTERTOPS
A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 400 requirements for countertops.
1. Grade: Custom.
B. Type of Top: High-pressure decorative laminate complying with the following:
1. Grade: GP-50, 0.050-inch nominal thickness.
2. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and
textures of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements:
a. Provide Architect's selections from manufacturer's full range of colors and finishes in
the following categories:
1) Solid colors.
2) Solid colors, with core same color as surface.
3) Wood grains.
4) Patterns.
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK Section 06 40 23 - 7
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
3. Grain Direction: Parallel to cabinet fronts.
4. Edge Treatment: Same as laminate cladding on horizontal surfaces.
5. Edge Treatment: As indicated.
6. Core Material: Exterior-grade plywood. ANSI Type I – SWE MDO Plywood or better.
7. Laminate Backer Sheet: .020 inch minimum thickness.
2.8 SHOP FINISHING OF INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 1500, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Grade: Provide finishes of same grades as items to be finished.
B. General: The entire finish of interior architectural woodwork is specified in this Section, regardless
of whether shop applied or applied after installation.
1. Shop Finishing: To the greatest extent possible, finish architectural woodwork at the
fabrication shop. Defer only final touch up, cleaning, and polishing until after installation.
C. Preparations for Finishing: Comply with referenced quality standard for sanding, filling countersunk
fasteners, sealing concealed surfaces, and similar preparations for finishing architectural woodwork,
as applicable to each unit of work.
1. Backpriming: Apply one coat of sealer or primer compatible with finish coats to concealed
surfaces of woodwork, including backs of trim, cabinets, paneling, and ornamental work and
the underside of countertops. Apply 2 coats to back of paneling. Concealed surfaces of
plastic laminate-clad woodwork do not require backpriming when surfaced with plastic
laminate or thermoset decorative overlay.
D. Washcoat for Stained Finish: Apply a vinyl washcoat to woodwork made from closed-grain wood
before staining and finishing.
1. Apply vinyl washcoat sealer after staining and before filling.
E. Transparent Finish: Comply with requirements indicated below for grade, finish system, staining,
and sheen, with sheen measured on 60-degree gloss meter per ASTM D 523.
1. Grade: Custom.
2. AWI Finish System TR-2: Catalyzed lacquer.
3. Staining: As selected by Architect from the full range of colors available in finish system
specified.
4. Sheen: Semigloss 55-75 gloss units.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas before installing.
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK Section 06 40 23 - 8
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
B. Before installing architectural woodwork, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and
complete work as required, including back priming and removal of packing.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Quality Standard: Install woodwork to comply with AWI Section 1700 for the same grade specified
in Part 2 of this Section for type of woodwork involved.
B. Install woodwork plumb, level, true, and straight with no distortions. Shim as required with
concealed shims. Install to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches for plumb and level (including tops).
C. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work and refinish cut surfaces or repair damaged finish at
cuts.
D. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure to
grounds, stripping and blocking with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required
for complete installation. Use fine finishing nails for exposed nailing, countersunk and filled flush
with woodwork and matching final finish where transparent finish is indicated.
E. Standing and Running Trim: Install with minimum number of joints possible, using full-length
pieces (from maximum length of lumber available) to the greatest extent possible. Do not use pieces
less than 36 inches long, except where necessary. Stagger joints in adjacent and related members.
Fill gaps, if any, between top of base and wall with plastic wood filler, sand smooth, and finish same
as wood base, if finished. Install standing and running trim with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch
variation from a straight line.
F. Cabinets: Install without distortion so that doors and drawers fit openings properly and are
accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide
unencumbered operation. Complete the installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated.
1. Install cabinets with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch sag, bow, or other variation from a
straight line.
2. Maintain veneer sequence matching of cabinets with transparent finish.
3. Seal all joints at end splashes with clear silicone. Max 1/16” bead.
G. Tops: Anchor securely to base units and other support systems as indicated. Caulk space between
backsplash and wall with specified sealant.
1. Install countertops with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch sag, bow, or other variation from a
straight line.
2. Secure backsplashes to tops with concealed metal brackets at 16 inches o.c.
H. Complete the finishing work specified in this Section to the extent not completed at shop or before
installation of woodwork. Fill nail holes with matching filler where exposed. Apply specified finish
coats, including stains and paste fillers if any, to exposed surfaces where only sealer/prime coats
were applied in the shop.
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK Section 06 40 23 - 9
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Repair damaged and defective woodwork where possible to eliminate functional and visual defects;
where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.
B. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware.
C. Clean woodwork on exposed and semi-exposed surfaces. Touch up shop-applied finishes to restore
damaged or soiled areas.
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to fabricator and Installer
that ensures that woodwork is without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion.
3.5 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORY SCHEDULE
A. BHMA numbers are used below to designate hardware requirements, except as otherwise indicated.
B. Butt Hinges: 2-3/4-inch, 5-knuckle steel hinges made from 0.095-inch- thick metal, and as follows:
1. Butt Hinges for Flush Doors: B01361.
C. Pulls: Wire pulls, 4 inches long, 1-1/2" deep, and 5/16 inches in diameter. Approved for
Handicapped Accessibility.
D. Catches: Magnetic Catches: B03141.
E. Adjustable Shelf Standards: B04071.
1. Shelf Rests for Standards: B04081.
F. Shelf Rests: B04013.
G. Drawer Boxes – Blum MetaBox System with 5/8” melamine bottoms. Drawer fronts to be plastic
clad.
1. Box Drawer Slides: 75 lbf.
2. File Drawer Slides: 150 lbf. – Full extension
3. Blum Metafile System at file drawers.
H. Door Locks: E07121.
I. Drawer Locks: E07041.
END OF SECTION
WATER REPELLENTS Section 07 19 00 - 1
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
SECTION 07 19 00 - WATER REPELLENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes installation of clear water-repellent coatings for all newly constructed exterior
masonry surfaces including:
1. Face Brick
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 04 Sections for brick.
2. Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for joint sealants.
3. Division 07 Sections for fluid-applied waterproofing and dampproofing.
4. Division 09 Section "Painting" for paints and coatings.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide water repellents with the following properties based on testing manufacturer's standard
products, according to test methods indicated, applied to substrates simulating Project conditions using
same materials and application methods to be used for Project.
1. Absorption: Minimum 90 percent reduction of absorption after 24 hours in comparison of
treated and untreated specimens.
a. Brick: ASTM C 67.
b. Stone: ASTM C 97.
c. Concrete Unit Masonry: ASTM C 140.
d. Hardened Concrete: ASTM C 642.
2. Water-Vapor Transmission: Maximum 10 percent reduction in rate of vapor transmission in
comparison of treated and untreated specimens, per ASTM E 96.
3. Water Penetration and Leakage through Masonry: Maximum 90 percent reduction in leakage
rate in comparison of treated and untreated specimens, per ASTM E 514.
4. Durability: Maximum 5 percent loss of water repellency after 2500 hours of weathering in
comparison to specimens before weathering, per ASTM G 53.
5. Permeability: Minimum 80 percent breathable in comparison of treated and untreated
specimens, per ASTM D 1653.
6. Chloride-Ion Intrusion in Concrete: Transportation Research Board, National Research
Council's NCHRP Report 244, Series II tests.
a. Reduction of Water Absorption: 80 percent.
WATER REPELLENTS Section 07 19 00 - 2
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
b. Reduction in Chloride Content: 80 percent.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include manufacturer's specifications, surface preparation and application instructions,
recommendations for water repellents for each surface to be treated, and protection and cleaning
instructions. Include data substantiating that materials are recommended by manufacturer for
applications indicated and comply with requirements.
B. Field Samples: Of each substrate indicated to receive water repellent, 12 inches (300 mm) square, with
specified repellent treatment applied to half of each sample.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable rules of pollution-control regulatory agency having
jurisdiction in Project locale regarding VOCs and use of hydrocarbon solvents.
B. Field Samples: Architect will select one representative surface for each substrate to receive water
repellents. Apply water repellent to each substrate, with either partial or full coverage as directed.
Comply with application requirements of this Section. *Obtain Architect's approval of field samples
before applying water repellents.
1. Maintain field samples during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for
judging the completed Work.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Weather and Substrate Conditions: Do not proceed with application of water repellent under any of the
following conditions, except with written instruction of manufacturer:
1. Ambient temperature is less than 40 deg F (4.4 deg C).
2. Concrete surfaces and mortar have cured for less than 28 days.
3. Rain or temperatures below 40 deg F (4.4 deg C) are predicted within 24 hours.
4. Application is earlier than 24 hours after surfaces have been wet.
5. Substrate is frozen, or surface temperature is less than 40 deg F (4.4 deg C).
6. Windy condition exists that may cause water repellent to be blown onto vegetation or surfaces
not intended to be coated.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Submit a written warranty, executed by the applicator and water repellent
manufacturer, covering materials and labor, agreeing to repair or replace materials that fail to provide
water repellency within the specified warranty period. Warranty does not include deterioration or
failure of coating due to unusual weather phenomena, failure of prepared and treated substrate,
formation of new joints and cracks in excess of 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) wide, fire, vandalism, or abuse by
maintenance equipment.
WATER REPELLENTS Section 07 19 00 - 3
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
1. Warranty Period: Five (5) years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into
the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
1. Siloxanes: With more than 3.3 lb/gal. (400 g/L) VOCs.
a. Prime-A-Pell 200; Chemprobe Technologies, Inc.
b. Euco-Guard 200; Euclid Chemical Company (The).
c. Thorosiloxane-8S; Harris Specialty Chemicals, Inc.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrate of substances that might interfere with penetration or performance of water repellents.
Test for moisture content, according to repellent manufacturer's written instructions, to ensure surface
is sufficiently dry.
1. Formed Concrete: Remove oil, curing compounds, laitance, and other substances that could
prevent adhesion or penetration of water repellents.
2. Clay Brick Masonry: Clean clay brick masonry per ASTM D 5703.
B. Test for pH level, according to water repellent manufacturer's written instructions, to ensure chemical
bond to silicate minerals.
C. Protect adjoining work, including sealant bond surfaces, from spillage or blow-over of water repellent.
Cover adjoining and nearby surfaces of aluminum and glass if there is the possibility of water repellent
being deposited on surfaces. Cover live plants and grass.
D. Coordination with Sealants: Do not apply water repellent until sealants for joints adjacent to surfaces
receiving water-repellent treatment have been installed and cured.
1. Water-repellent work may precede sealant application only if sealant adhesion and
compatibility have been tested and verified using substrate, water repellent, and sealant
materials identical to those used in the work.
E. Test Application: Before performing water-repellent work, including bulk purchase and delivery of
products, prepare a small application in an unobtrusive location and in a manner approved by Architect
to demonstrate the final effect (visual, physical, and chemical) of planned application. Proceed with
work only after Architect approves test application or as otherwise directed.
WATER REPELLENTS Section 07 19 00 - 4
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
1. Revisions of planned application, if any, as requested by Architect, will be by Change Order if
they constitute a departure from requirements of Contract Documents at the time of
contracting.
3.2 APPLICATION
A. Apply a heavy-saturation spray coating of water repellent on surfaces indicated for treatment using low-
pressure spray equipment. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for using airless spraying
procedure, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Apply a second saturation spray coating, repeating first application. Comply with manufacturer's
written instructions for limitations on drying time between coats and after rainstorm wetting of surfaces
between coats. Consult manufacturer's technical representative if written instructions are not applicable
to Project conditions.
3.3 CLEANING
A. Protective Coverings: Remove protective coverings from adjacent surfaces and other protected areas.
B. Immediately clean water repellent from adjoining surfaces and surfaces soiled or damaged by water-
repellent application as work progresses. Repair damage caused by water-repellent application.
Comply with manufacturer's written cleaning instructions.
END OF SECTION
BUILDING INSULATION Section 07 21 00 - 1
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
SECTION 07 21 00 - BUILDING INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Rigid board cavity wall insulation
2. Fiberglass insulation at ceilings and soffits where scheduled.
3. Slag/Rock wool insulation between roof deck and top of walls.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 04 Section "Unit Masonry" for coordination of insulation installed in cavity walls.
2. Division 07 Section for coordination of insulation installed in cavity wall and “Fluid Applied
Water Barrier”.
3. Division 07 Section “Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing” for insulation specified as part of
roofing construction.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections.
B. Product Data for each type of insulation product specified.
C. Product test reports from and based on tests performed by a qualified independent testing agency
evidencing compliance of insulation products with specified requirements including those for thermal
resistance, fire-test-response characteristics, water-vapor transmission, water absorption, and other
properties, based on comprehensive testing of current products.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Single-Source Responsibility for Insulation Products: Obtain each type of building insulation from a
single source with resources to provide products complying with requirements indicated without
delaying the Work.
B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide insulation and related materials with the fire-test-response
characteristics indicated on Drawings or specified elsewhere in this Section as determined by testing
identical products per test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency
BUILDING INSULATION Section 07 21 00 - 2
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify materials with appropriate markings of
applicable testing and inspecting agency.
1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: ASTM E 84.
2. Fire-Resistance Ratings: ASTM E 119.
3. Combustion Characteristics: ASTM E 136.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by moisture, soiling, and
other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for
handling, storing, and protecting during installation.
B. Protect plastic insulation as follows:
1. Do not expose to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and
concealment.
2. Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver plastic insulating materials to Project site
before installation time.
3. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area
of construction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering insulation
products that may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Glass-Fiber Insulation:
a. CertainTeed Corporation.
b. Knauf Fiber Glass GmbH.
c. Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corporation.
d. Schuller International, Inc.
2. Slag-Wool-/Rock-Wool-Fiber Insulation:
a. Fibrex Inc.
b. Partek Insulations, Inc.
c. USG Interiors, Inc.
3. Polyisocyanurate Foam Insulation Board:
a. Celotex
2.2 INSULATING MATERIALS
A. General: Provide insulating materials that comply with requirements and with referenced standards.
1. Preformed Units: Sizes to fit applications indicated; selected from manufacturer's standard
thicknesses, widths, and lengths.
BUILDING INSULATION Section 07 21 00 - 3
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
B. Unfaced Flexible Glass-Fiber Board Insulation: Thermal insulation combining glass fibers with
thermosetting resin binders, unfaced; comply with ASTM C 612, Type IA; or with ASTM C 553,
Types I, II, and III; and with other requirements indicated below:
1. Nominal Density: 1.5 lb/cu. ft. (24 kg/cu. m).
2. Thermal Resistivity: 4.13 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu x in. at 75 deg F (28.6 K x m/W at
24 deg C).
3. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indices of 25
and 50, respectively.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements of
Sections in which substrates and related work are specified and to determine if other conditions
affecting performance of insulation are satisfactory. Do not proceed with installation until
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrates of substances harmful to insulations or vapor retarders, including removing
projections capable of puncturing vapor retarders or that interfere with insulation attachment.
B. Close off openings in cavities receiving poured-in-place insulation to prevent escape of insulation.
Provide bronze or stainless-steel screens (inside) where openings must be maintained for drainage or
ventilation.
3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and application
indicated.
B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, unsoiled, and has not been exposed at any time to ice and
snow.
C. Extend insulation in thickness indicated to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly
around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement.
D. Apply single layer of insulation to produce thickness indicated, unless multiple layers are otherwise
shown or required to make up total thickness.
BUILDING INSULATION Section 07 21 00 - 4
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
3.4 INSTALLATION OF GENERAL BUILDING INSULATION
A. Apply insulation units to substrates by method, complying with manufacturer's written instructions.
Bond units to substrate with adhesive or use mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement
and support of units.
B. Seal joints between closed-cell (nonbreathing) insulation units by applying adhesive, mastic, or sealant
to edges of each unit to form a tight seal as units are shoved into place. Fill voids in completed
installation with adhesive, mastic, or sealant as recommended by insulation manufacturer.
C. Set vapor-retarder-faced units with vapor retarder to warm side of construction, unless otherwise
indicated. Do not obstruct ventilation spaces, except for firestopping.
1. Tape joints and ruptures in vapor retarder and seal each continuous area of insulation to
surrounding construction to ensure airtight installation.
D. Set reflective, foil-faced units with not less than 0.75-inch (19-mm) air space in front of foil as
indicated.
E. Install board insulation on concrete masonry substrates by adhesively attached, spindle-type insulation
anchors as follows:
1. Cut insulation boards to fit tightly between masonry anchorage system (16” o.c.). Adhere
insulation board or mechanically fasten insulation at areas without continuous masonry
anchorage.
3.5 INSTALLATION OF VAPOR RETARDERS
A. General: Extend vapor retarder to extremities of areas to be protected from vapor transmission.
Secure in place with adhesives or other anchorage system as indicated. Extend vapor retarder to cover
miscellaneous voids in insulated substrates, including those filled with loose-fiber insulation.
B. Seal vertical joints in vapor retarders over framing by lapping not less than 2 wall studs. Fasten vapor
retarders to framing at top, end, and bottom edges; at perimeter of wall openings; and at lap joints.
Space fasteners 16 inches (406 mm) o.c.
C. Seal overlapping joints in vapor retarders with adhesives or vapor-retarder tape according to vapor
retarder manufacturer's instructions. Seal butt joints and fastener penetrations with vapor-retarder tape.
Locate all joints over framing members or other solid substrates.
D. Firmly attach vapor retarders to substrates with mechanical fasteners or adhesives as recommended by
vapor retarder manufacturer.
E. Seal joints caused by pipes, conduits, electrical boxes, and similar items penetrating vapor retarders
with vapor-retarder tape to create an airtight seal between penetrating objects and vapor retarder.
F. Repair any tears or punctures in vapor retarders immediately before concealment by other work.
Cover with vapor-retarder tape or another layer of vapor retarder.
BUILDING INSULATION Section 07 21 00 - 5
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
3.4 PROTECTION
A. General: Protect installed insulation and vapor retarders from damage due to harmful weather
exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where
insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction
immediately after installation.
3.5 SCHEDULE OF INSULATION TYPES
A. Exterior Stud Walls – unfaced fiberglass batt insulation
B. Insulation in interior drywall partitions. Thickness as indicated in the Drawings.
C. Rigid glass fiber reinforced polyisocyanurate foam insulation board with foil face on both sides. Total
thickness as designated in the Drawings. R Value = 8 per inch.
D. Above soffits at scheduled locations, only 6” thick unfaced fiberglass insulation.
END OF SECTION
TAPERED ROOF INSULATION SYSTEM Section 07 22 00 - 1
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
SECTION 07 22 00 – TAPERED ROOF INSULATION SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Mechanically fastened tapered polyisocyanurate insulation for roof surface, roof crickets and back
slope to roof gutter system.
1.2 RELATED SECTION
A. Section 01410 – Windstorm Construction Requirements
B. Section 06 10 00 – Wood Blocking and Curbing: Wood nailers.
C. Section 07 62 00 – Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Weather protection to base flashings.
D. Section 07 54 00 – Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing
E. Section 07 72 00 – Prefabricated Roofing Specialties.
F. Section 22 11 19 – Plumbing Specialties.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. ANSI/.ASTM D41 – Asphalt Primer Used in Roofing, Dampproofing, and Waterproofing.
B. ASNI/ASTM D312 – Asphalt Used in Roofing.
C. ANSI/ASTM D2178 – Asphalt Impregnated Glass (Felt) Mat Used in Roofing and Waterproofing.
D. Factory Mutual (FM) Engineering Corporation – Roof Assembly Classifications.
E. National Roofing Contractors Association (NRCA) – Roofing and Waterproofing Manual.
F. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) – Fire Hazard Classifications.
G. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) – Wind Up-Lift Requirements.
1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Fully adhered tapered insulation system over 3-inch thick mechanically fastened rigid installation.
Install coverboard slope to be ¼-inch per foot typical and ⅛-inch per foot at crickets. Minimum
thickness to be 1 ½” at edge nailer at all sides of each building.
TAPERED ROOF INSULATION SYSTEM Section 07 22 00 - 2
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
1.5 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
A. Create adequate slope to direct all roof water to roof top drainage system.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300.
B. Product Data: Provide insulation and bitumen materials.
C. Submittals: Dimensioned Roof top plan indicating materials and thickness.
D. Manufacturer’s Installation Instructions.
E. Manufacturer’s Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this Section with
minimum five years documented experience and listed by name in this specification.
B. Applicator: Company specializing in applying bituminous and thermoplastic roofing with minimum
five years documented experience and approved by materials manufacturer for a minimum of one year
prior to bid date.
C. Work of this Section to conform to NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual and manufacturer’s
instructions. No roof membrane penetrations which do not conform to NRCA details will be allowed
to be installed or to remain in place. Pitch pans will not be allowed for any reason.
1.8 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to 2012 Edition of International Building Code for roof assembly and fire hazard
requirements.
B. Fire Hazard Classification: UL Class A.
C. Roof Assembly Classification: UL I-90 Wind Up-Lift Requirements and Texas Windstorm
requirements – construct to meet or exceed Inland 1 uplift requirements.
1.9 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE
A. Convene a pre-installation conference one week prior to commencing work on this Section.
B. Review installation procedures and coordination required with related work.
TAPERED ROOF INSULATION SYSTEM Section 07 22 00 - 3
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01600.
B. Deliver products in manufacturer’s original containers, dry, undamaged, seals and labels intact.
C. Store products in weather protected environment, clear of ground and moisture.
1.11 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Do not apply insulation during inclement weather.
B. Do not apply insulation to damp or frozen deck surface.
C. Do not expose materials vulnerable to water or sun damage in quantities greater than can be
weatherproofed during same day.
1.12 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate work under provisions of Section 01045.
B. Coordinate the work with installation of associated materials as the work of this Section proceeds.
1.13 WARRANTY
A. Provide warranty with roofing system specified in Section 07 54 00.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS - INSULATION
A. Hunter.
B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600.
TAPERED ROOF INSULATION SYSTEM Section 07 22 00 - 4
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
2.2 INSULATION
A. Insulation: Mechanically Fastened Tapered Polyisocyanurate Insulation board; with the following
characteristics:
Board Slope: ½-inch per foot to achieve ½-inch slope to roof drains from parapet
Board Size: 24 x 48-inch
Board Thickness Varies
Thermal Resistance: Minimum aged R-value = 5.6 per inch thickness
Board Edges: Square
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that surfaces and site conditions are ready to receive work.
B. Verify coverboard is supported and secured.
C. Verify coverboard is clean and smooth, free of depressions, waves, or projections, properly sloped.
D. Verify deck surfaces are clean and dry.
E. Verify roof openings, curbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts, and vents through roof are solidly set.
3.2 TAPERED INSULATION APPLICATION
A. Mechanically attach first layer of insulation to deck. Install tapered insulation and coverboard with
adhesive, in accordance with insulation manufacturer’s instructions. Lay coverboard of insulation with
joints staggered from first layer.
B. Minimum Insulation Thickness: 1 ½-inch base insulation, excluding coverboard.
C. Lay insulation boards with edges in moderate contact without forcing. Cut insulation to fit neatly to
perimeter blocking and around penetrations through roof.
D. Lay tapered boards as indicated on roof plans to achieve crickets.
E. Place coverboard perpendicular to insulation board, stagger joints.
F. Apply no more insulation than can be sealed with membrane in same day.
G. Tape joints of insulation (if required for UL ratings or manufacturer’s warranty) in accordance with
insulation manufacturer’s instructions.
TAPERED ROOF INSULATION SYSTEM Section 07 22 00 - 5
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
3.3 MEMBRANE APPLICATION
A. See Section 07 54 00 “Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing”
3.4 CLEANING
A. Remove bituminous markings from finished surfaces.
B. In areas where finished surfaces are soiled by work of this Section, consult manufacturer of surfaces
for cleaning advice and conform to their documented instructions.
C. Repair or replace defaced or disfigured finishes caused by work of this Section.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect building surfaces against damage from roofing work.
B. Where traffic must continue over finished roof membrane, protect surfaces.
END OF SECTION
VAPOR BARRIER Section 07 26 13 - 1
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
SECTION 07 26 13 - VAPOR BARRIER
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Installation of a vapor barrier under concrete building foundations.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 31 23 23 – Fill and Backfill
B. Section 03 10 00 – Concrete Forms and Accessories
C. Section 03 30 00 – Cast-In-Place Concrete
1.3 REFERENCES
A. ASTM E 1643-94: Standard Practice for Installation of Water Vapor Retarders used in Contact with
Earth Under Concrete Slabs.
B. ASTM E 1745: Standard Specification for Water Vapor Retarders used in Contact with Earth Under
Concrete Slabs – Exceeds Class B.
C. ASTM E 96: Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 1995.
D. GRI-GS 1-86: Puncture Resistant
E. ASTM D 1709: Standard Test Methods for Puncture Resistance
F. ASTM D 638: Standard Test Methods for Tensile Properties of Plastic; 1996
G. ASTM D 1790: Standard Test Methods for Low Temperature Brittleness.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. See Specification Section 01300 – “Submittals” for administrative requirements and submittal
procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer’s printed product literature and description, including tests and
standards that have been performed on the vapor barrier material.
C. Samples: Submit two (2), 8 ½” x 11” in size, illustrating the vapor barrier and two (2), 8 ½” long
sample strips of the joint tape.
D. One (1) each of all accessories that will be used in the installation.
VAPOR BARRIER Section 07 26 13 - 2
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
E. Verification by independent testing laboratories indicating that materials comply with specified
requirements.
F. Certificates: Certify that products of this Section meet or exceed specified requirements.
G. Manufacturer’s Instructions: Indicate complete installation instructions.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer’s Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this
Section, with not less than three (3) years of documented experience.
B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this Section with minimum
five (5) years’ experience.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION
A. Deliver Vapor Barrier to project site in manufacturer’s original container/packaging.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Coordinate Vapor Barrier installation with size, location and installation of service utilities.
B. Sequence installation to ensure utility connections are achieved in an orderly and expeditious manner.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURER
A. Xtreme Vapor Barrier; P. O. Box 58, Channelview, Texas 77530. Customer Service: Telephone (713)
481-3415
1. Contacts:
a. Local Rep: Mike Johnson – Telephone (361) 774-1482
b. Sales Manager: Greg Jones – Telephone (713) 481-3413
c. Specs: Amy McNair – Telephone (713) 481-3442
B. W.R. Meadows, Perminator 20 mil. as an approved equal. Telephone (800) 342-5976
C. No substitutions will be considered without prior approval prior to bid date.
VAPOR BARRIER Section 07 26 13 - 3
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Vapor Barrier
1. Extruded 20 mil polyolefin membrane.
2. Material manufactured with ISO certified virgin resins.
3. Sheet polyethylene is not acceptable.
2.4 ACCESSORIES
A. Tape
1. High Density Polyethylene Tape, manufactured by same manufacturer, with pressure
sensitive adhesive. Minimum width: 4”.
B. Pipe Boot
1. Construct pipe boots from vapor barrier material and pressure sensitive tape per
manufacturer’s instructions or manufacturer mastic.
2.5 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL AND TESTS
A. Reference Standards
1. Water Vapor Retarders used in Contact with Earth under Concrete Slabs: Exceeds Class B
according to ASTM E 1745.
2. Water Vapor Transmission Rates: 0.006 gr/ft²/hr according to ASTM E 96
3. Permeance Rating Result: 0.01 gr/ft²/hr according to ASTM E96
4. Puncture Resistance Result: 204.0-lbs/sq ft according to GRI-GS 1-86
5. Puncture Resistance Result: 1972.5 grams according to ASTM D 1709
6. Tensile Strength Result: 54.2-lbs / MD and 55.5-lbs / CMD according to ASTM D 638,
ASTM E 154
7. Low Temperature Brittleness: Pass according to ASTM D 1790
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that conditions are acceptable for the placement of the vapor barrier.
B. Architect/Engineer shall be notified to inspect Vapor Barrier prior to installation of rebar.
C. Manufacturer representative shall inspect after installation with written letter report.
VAPOR BARRIER Section 07 26 13 - 4
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Ensure that subsoil is compacted and approved by Geotechnical Consultant.
1. Vapor Barrier may be installed over an aggregate, sand or tamped or earth base.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install Vapor Barrier per manufacturer’s instruction, illustrations and ASTM E 1643-94: Standard
Practice for Installation of Water Vapor Retarders used in Contact with Earth Under Concrete Slabs.
1. Level and tamp or roll granular base.
2. Place Vapor Barrier with the longest dimension parallel with the direction of the pour.
3. Lap Vapor Barrier over footings and seal to foundation walls. Seal all penetrations.
4. Lap joints 6” and seal with the recommended pressure sensitive tape.
5. Seal pipe penetrations with pipe boot made from Vapor Barrier and tape.
6. Protect Vapor Barrier from damage during installation of reinforcing steel and utilities.
7. Repair damaged areas by cutting patches of Vapor Barrier, overlapping damaged area 6” and
taping all 4 sides with pressure sensitive tape.
3.4 INTERFACE WITH OTHER WORK
A. Coordinate work with all other trades related to the slab base and utility services.
3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean all contaminants from surface.
B. Protect installed vapor barrier from subsequent damaging construction operations.
C. Do not permit vehicular/heavy equipment traffic over unprotected Vapor Barrier.
END OF SECTION
FLUID-APPLIED WEATHER BARRIER Section 07 27 26 - 1
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
SECTION 07 27 26 – FLUID-APPLIED WEATHER BARRIER
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Fluid-applied, vapor permeable weather barrier membrane on soffit and wall sheathing, wood
nailers/blocking and all exterior faces of concrete masonry units.
B. Joint Tape
C. Flashing
1. Vapor Permeable Elastomeric Flashing
2. Flexible Flashing
3. Sheet Flashing
D. Joint Compound
E. Sealant
F. Primers for flexible flashing and sheet flashing
1.2 REFERENCES
A. ASTM International
1. ASTM C 1250 – Standard Test Method for Nonvolatile Content of Cold Liquid-Applied
Elastomeric Waterproofing Membranes.
2. ASTM D 412 – Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomers
– Tension.
3. ASTM D 2240 – Standard Test Method for Rubber Property – Durometer Hardness.
4. ASTM D 4541 – Standard Test Method for Pull-off Strength of Coatings Using Portable
Adhesion Testers.
5. ASTM E 84 – Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building
Materials.
6. ASTM E 96 - Test Method for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials
7. ASTM E 283 – Standard Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage through
Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors under Specified Pressure Differences Across the
Specimen.
8. ASTM E 331 – Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylight,
Doors and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Differences.
9. ASTM E 779 – Standard Test Method for Determining Air Leakage Rate by Fan
Pressurization.
10. ASTM E 783 – Standard Test Method for Field Measurement of Air Leakage through
Installed Exterior Windows and Doors.
11. ASTM E 1105 – Standard Test Method for Field Determination of Water Penetration of
Installed Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls, by Uniform or Cyclic Static
Air Pressure Difference.
FLUID-APPLIED WEATHER BARRIER Section 07 27 26 - 2
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
12. ASTM E 1186 – Standard Practices for Air Leakage Site Detection in Building Envelopes and
Air Barrier Systems.
13. ASTM E 1677 - Specification for Air Retarder Material or System for Framed Building
Walls.
14. ASTM E 2178 – Standard Test Method for Air Permeance of Building Materials
15. ASTM E 2357 – Standard Test Method for Determining Air Leakage of Air Barrier
Assemblies.
16. ASTM G155 – Standard Practice for Operating Xenon Arc Light Apparatus for Exposure of
Non-Metallic Materials
B. AATCC – American Association of Textile Chemists & Colorists.
1. Test Method 127 Water Resistance: Hydrostatic Pressure Test.
C. TAPPI
1. Test Method T-460; Air Resistance of Paper (Gurley Hill Method).
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Refer to Section 01300 “Submittals”.
B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s current technical literature for each component.
C. Quality Assurance Submittals:
1. Design Data, Test Reports: Provide manufacturer test reports indicating product compliance
with indicated requirements.
2. Manufacturer Instructions: Provide manufacturer’s written installation instructions.
3. Manufacturer’s Field Service Reports: Provide site reports from authorized filed service
representative, indicating observation of weather barrier system installation.
D. Closeout Submittals:
1. Refer to Section 01700 “Contract Closeout”.
2. Weather Barrier Warranty: Manufacturer’s executed warranty form with authorized signatures
and endorsements indicating date of Substantial Completion.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications:
1. Installer shall have experience with installation of commercial fluid-applied weather barrier
assemblies under similar conditions.
2. Installer shall be trained and certified for installation by manufacturer.
B. Installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s installation guidelines and recommendations.
FLUID-APPLIED WEATHER BARRIER Section 07 27 26 - 3
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
C. Source Limitations: Provide weather barrier and accessory materials produced by single manufacturer.
D. Mock-up:
1. Install mock-up using approved weather barrier system including membrane, flashing, joint
and detailing compound and related weather barrier accessories according to weather barrier
manufacturer’s current printed instructions and recommendations.
a. Mock-up Size: 10 feet x 10 feet
b. Mock-up Substrate: Match wall assembly construction, including window opening.
c. Mock-up may not remain as part of the work.
2. Contact manufacturer’s designated representative prior to weather barrier system installation,
to perform required mock-up visual inspection and analysis as required for warranty.
E. Pre-installation Meeting:
1. Refer to Section 01200 Project Meetings.
2. Hold a pre-installation conference, two weeks prior to start of weather barrier installation.
Attendees shall include Contractor, Architect, certified installer, Owner’s Representative, and
weather barrier manufacturer’s designated field representative.
3. Review all related project requirements and submittals, status of substrate work and
preparation, areas of potential conflict and interface, availability of weather equipment,
facilities and scaffolding, and coordinate methods, procedures and sequencing requirements
for full and proper installation, integration and protection.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Refer to Section 01600 “Materials and Equipment”.
B. Deliver weather barrier materials and components in manufacturer’s original, unopened, undamaged
containers with identification labels intact.
C. Store weather barrier materials as recommended by manufacturer.
1.6 SCHEDULING
A. Review requirements for sequencing of installation of weather barrier system with installation of
windows, doors, louvers and flashings to provide a weather-tight barrier system.
B. Schedule installation of exterior cladding within nine months of weather barrier system installation.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Refer to Section 01740 “Warranties”.
B. Limited Warranty
FLUID-APPLIED WEATHER BARRIER Section 07 27 26 - 4
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
1. Manufacturer's warranty for weather barrier for a period of ten (10) years from date of
Purchase.
2. Pre-installation meeting and jobsite observations by weather barrier manufacturer for
warranty are required.
3. Warranty Areas: Base course flashing, liquid applied weather barriers on masonry and
plywood sheathing, and flashing, and seals at all wall penetrations and seals to roof deck.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 WEATHER BARRIER
A. Manufacturer: DuPont Building Innovations; 4417 Lancaster Pike, Chestnut Run Plaza 728,
Wilmington, DE 19805; 1.800.44TYVEK (8-9835); http://weatherization.tyvek.com
1. Description: A single-component, low VOC, 25 mil thick synthetic polymer fluid-applied
product with superior elasticity and flexibility providing resistance to air flow, bulk water and
wind driven rain yet allows moisture vapor to escape.
2. Basis of Design: DuPont™ Tyvek® Fluid Applied WB System; including DuPont™ Tyvek®
Fluid Applied WB, DuPont™ Tyvek® Fluid Applied Flashing and Joint Compound, DuPont™
Tyvek® Fluid Applied Flashing – Brush Grade and DuPont™ Sealant for Tyvek® Fluid
Applied Systems.
B. Performance Characteristics:
1. Air Penetration: 0.0002 cfm/ft2 at 75 Pa, when tested in accordance with ASTM
E 2178. Type I per ASTM E 1677 and ≤ 0.01 cfm/ft2 at 75 Pa, when tested in accordance
with ASTM E 2357.
2. Water Vapor Transmission: 25 perms, when tested in accordance with ASTM
E 96, Method B at 25 mils DFT (Dry Film Thickness).
3. Water Penetration Resistance: Greater than 1000 cm when tested in accordance with AATCC
Test Method 127. No leakage at 15 psf when tested in accordance with ASTM E 331.
4. Air Resistance: Air infiltration greater than 10,000 seconds per 100cc, when tested in
accordance with TAPPI Test Method T-460.
5. Tensile Strength: Minimum 169 lbs/in2, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 412.
6. Estimated Elongation: 420% in accordance with ASTM D 412.
7. Hardness: Passes at a Shore A hardness of 71, when tested in accordance with ASTM D
2240.
8. Surface Burning Characteristics: Class A, when tested in accordance with ASTM
E 84. Flame Spread: 25, Smoke Developed: 25.
9. Accelerated Weathering: 9 month exposure of membrane to ultraviolet light (UV) in
accordance with ASTM G 155.
10. Volatile Organic Content (VOC): Less than 2% when measured in accordance with ASTM
C 1250.
11. Adhesion Strength (Concrete): Greater than 33 psi when measured in accordance with ASTM
D 4541
FLUID-APPLIED WEATHER BARRIER Section 07 27 26 - 5
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
2.2 ACCESSORIES
A. Joint Tape: Self-adhered fiberglass mesh tape as recommended by weather barrier manufacturer.
B. Flashing:
1. Vapor permeable elastomeric flashing:
a. Product: DuPont™ Tyvek® Fluid Applied Flashing – Brush Grade as manufactured by
DuPont™.
2. Flexible flashing with butyl adhesive layer.
a. Product: DuPont™ FlexWrap™ NF.
3. Sheet flashing with butyl adhesive layer.
a. Product: DuPont™ StraightFlash™.
C. Joint Compound: Fluid-applied, vapor permeable, elastomeric flashing material; trowel applied.
1. Product: DuPont™ Tyvek® Fluid Applied Flashing and Joint Compound.
D. Sealant:
1. Product: DuPont™ Sealant for Tyvek® Fluid Applied Systems.
E. Primers for flexible flashing and sheet flashing:
1. Provide flashing manufacturer recommended primer to assist in adhesion between substrate
and flashing.
2. Products:
a. 3M High Strength 90
b. Denso Butyl Spray
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify substrate and surface conditions are in accordance with weather barrier manufacturer
recommended tolerances prior to installation of weather barrier and accessories.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Complete surface preparation, priming, flashing and detailing of openings, cracks, and material
transitions prior to beginning installation of fluid-applied weather barrier system.
B. Surfaces shall be clean and free of frost, oil, grease, mold and efflorescence prior to application of
fluid-applied weather barrier system.
FLUID-APPLIED WEATHER BARRIER Section 07 27 26 - 6
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
3.3 INSTALLATION – DETAILING
A. Corners: Apply primer to outside and inside corners, extend 2 inches on each side of corner. Center
sheet flashing over corner and press firmly in place per manufacturer’s recommendations. Apply ½
inch fillet bead of joint compound applied to full-height of inside corners.
B. Joint Treatment:
1. Sheathing:
a. Joints shall be prepared per manufacturer’s approved joint treatment details.
b. Apply joint tape as recommended by fluid-applied weather barrier manufacturer.
1) No joint treatment required for joints up to 1/16 inch.
2) Joints 1/16 to 1/4 inch: Joint compound applied to form a 1 inch width on each
side of sheathing joint; smooth joint compound across sheathing joint. Thickness
shall be 15 to 25 mils.
3) Joints 1/16 to 1/2 inch: Apply joint tape to bridge both sides of joint equally.
Apply joint compound and trowel smooth embedding joint compound uniformly
into joint tape to form a 1 inch width on each side of sheathing joint at a consistent
thickness of 15 to 25 mils.
4) Joints 1/2 to 1 inch: Apply sheet flashing primer above and below sheathing joint.
Center sheet flashing over sheathing joint and press firmly in place per
manufacturer’s recommendations.
2. Non-movement joints in masonry and transitions to columns and beams:
a. Joints 1/4 inch wide or less: Apply joint compound a minimum of 2 inches wide by 60
mils thick to each side of joint or crack.
b. Joints 1/4 to 1/2 inch: Apply primer 2 inches on each side of joint. Center sheet flashing
over joint and press firmly in place per manufacturer’s recommendations.
C. Apply joint compound to cladding anchors prior to installation of weather barrier membrane per
manufacturer’s instructions.
D. Apply joint compound around penetrations in exterior walls forming a fillet bead minimum ½ inch
onto each surface
E. Installation – Flexible flashing at openings:
1. Prime substrates as recommended by self-adhered sheet membrane flashing manufacturer. Cut
sheet membrane flashing a minimum of 12 inches longer than length of sill rough opening.
2. Cover horizontal sill by aligning sheet membrane edge with inside edge of sill. Adhere to
rough opening across sill and up jambs a minimum of 6 inches. Secure sheet membrane
tightly into corners by working in along the sill before adhering up the jambs.
3. Fan sheet membrane at bottom corners onto face of wall. Firmly press in place.
4. Apply 9-inch wide strips of sheet membrane at jambs. Align sheet membrane with interior
edge of jamb framing. Start sheet membrane at head of opening and lap sheet membrane at
sill.
5. Install sheet membrane at opening head using same installation procedures used at sill.
Overlap jamb flashing a minimum of 2 inches.
6. Coordinate flashing with fluid-applied weather barrier and window installation
FLUID-APPLIED WEATHER BARRIER Section 07 27 26 - 7
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
F. Allow Flashing, Joint Compound and Sealant to cure for minimum 24 hours before coating with Fluid-
applied Weather Barrier
3.4 INSTALLATION – FLUID-APPLIED WEATHER BARRIER
A. Install fluid-applied weather barrier prior to installation of windows, doors, and louvers.
B. Mask and protect any adjacent finished surfaces from fluid-applied weather barrier material.
C. Install fluid-applied weather barrier over exterior face of required exterior wall substrates in
accordance with weather barrier manufacturer recommendations and instructions.
D. Install fluid-applied weather barrier by pressure rolling method to achieve 25 mils providing a
consistent and uniform thickness.
E. Repair any voids, holidays, or non-uniform installations or damage by other trades to proper mil
thickness prior to installation of final cladding assemblies
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Notify weather barrier manufacturer’s designated representative to obtain [required] periodic
observations of weather barrier system installation.
B. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections as
required in Contract Documents.
C. Inspections: Weather barrier materials, accessories, and installation are subject to inspection for
compliance with performance requirements.
D. Tests: As determined by Owner's testing agency from among the following tests:
1. Quantitative Air-Leakage Testing: Weather barrier assemblies will be tested for air leakage
according to ASTM E 783.
2. Qualitative Air-Leakage Testing: Weather barrier assemblies will be tested for air leakage
according to ASTM E 779.
3. Qualitative Water-Leakage Testing: Weather barrier assemblies will be tested for water
leakage according to ASTM E 1105.
4. Qualitative Air-Leakage Testing: Weather barrier assemblies will be tested for evidence of
air leakage according to ASTM E 1186.
E. Weather barriers assemblies will be considered defective upon failure of inspections and specific
project testing required.
1. Apply additional fluid-applied weather barrier material, in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions, where inspection results indicate insufficient thickness, voids, skips, pinholes or
other defects as recommended by weather barrier manufacturer.
2. Remove and replace deficient weather barrier system components for retesting as specified
above.
FLUID-APPLIED WEATHER BARRIER Section 07 27 26 - 8
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
F. Repair damage to weather barriers caused by destructive testing; follow manufacturer's written
instructions.
3.6 PROTECTION AND CLEANING
A. Protect weather barrier from contact with incompatible materials and sealants not approved per
weather barrier manufacturer’s recommendation.
B. Protect installed weather barrier system from damage during construction prior to cladding installation.
1. If damaged or exposed to UV beyond nine (9) months, clean and prepare surfaces and install
additional, full-thickness, fluid-applied weather barrier application in accordance with
weather barrier manufacturer's instructions.
C. Remove masking materials and adjacent protection after weather barrier installation.
END OF SECTION
THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING [PVC] Section 07 54 00 - 1
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
SECTION 07 54 00 -THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING (PVC)
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Qualifications, Standards and Materials for new roof assembly.
2. Cleaning existing roof deck surface.
3. Roof insulation and coverboard
4. Adhered membrane roofing system.
5. Traffic pads.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 01 Section 01785 “Applicator Warranty”
2. Division 01 Section “Windstorm Construction Requirements”
3. Division 06 Section “Carpentry Work (for Roofing)" for wood nailers, curbs, grounds, and
blocking.
4. Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for metal roof penetration flashings,
flashings, and counterflashing.
5. Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories."
6. Division 07 Section “Tapered Roof Insulation”
7. Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants (for Roofing)."
8. Division 23 Section “Basic Materials and Methods” for procedures for modifying, repairing,
or replacing roof mounted plumbing, piping and mechanical equipment and replacement of
roof mounted piping.
9. Division 26 “Basic Materials and Methods” for procedures for modifying, repairing or
replacing roof mounted electrical equipment and devices, and repair or replacement of roof
mounted electrical items.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
1. A 653 -Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated, (galvanized) by the Hot-Dip process, Structural (Physical)
Quality Property.
2. C 1289 -Faced Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal Insulation Board.
3. D 1079 -Terminology Relating to Roofing, Waterproofing, and Bituminous Materials.
THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING [PVC] Section 07 54 00 - 2
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
B. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE): ASCE 7-98: Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and
Other Structures
C. National Roofing Contractors Association (NRCA): Roofing and Waterproofing Manual.
D. Single Ply Roofing Institute (SPRI): Flexible Membrane Roofing: A Professional's Guide to
Specifications, "Wind Load Design Guide for Fully Adhered and Mechanically Fastened Roofing
Systems.”
E. Underwriters’ Laboratories (UL): Fire Hazard Classifications.
1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. Roofing Terminology: Refer to ASTM D 1079 and glossary of NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and
Waterproofing Manual" for definition of terms related to roofing work in this Section.
B. Design Uplift Pressure: The uplift pressure, calculated according to procedures in SPRI's "Wind Load
Design Guide for Fully Adhered and Mechanically Fastened Roofing Systems," before multiplication
by a safety factor.
C. Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing System: Mechanically fastened insulation system, fully adhered
single-ply roof membrane system.
1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Provide installed roofing membrane and base flashings that remain watertight; do not permit
the passage of water; and resist specified uplift pressures, thermally induced movement, and exposure
to weather without failure.
B. Material Compatibility: Provide roofing materials that are compatible with one another under
conditions of service and application required, as demonstrated by roofing membrane manufacturer
based on testing and field experience.
C. Roofing System Design: Provide a membrane roofing system that is identical to systems that have
been successfully tested by a qualified testing and inspecting agency to resist uplift pressure calculated
according to ASCE 7.
1. Corner Uplift Pressure: 147 lbf/sq. ft.
2. Perimeter Uplift Pressure: 97 lbf/sq. ft.
3. Field-of-Roof Uplift Pressure: 58 lbf/sq. ft.
4. Design Windspeed: 120 miles-per-hour (3 second gust).
5. Exposure Category: C.
6. Importance Factor: 1.15.
D. Products must be listed and approved by the Texas Department of Insurance as complying with all
requirements of the Texas Windstorm Code for Inland Zone-1.
THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING [PVC] Section 07 54 00 - 3
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Product List: Submit list of proposed Products and manufacturers, including all items specified in Part
2 – Products or otherwise required by the Work.
B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
C. Shop Drawings: For roofing system. Include plans, elevations, sections, details and attachments to
other Work.
1. Base flashings and membrane terminations.
2. Tapered insulation, including slopes.
3. Insulation fastening patterns.
D. Samples for Verification: For the following products:
1. 12-by-12-inch square of sheet roofing, of color specified, including T-shaped side and end lap
seam.
2. 12-by-12-inch square of roof insulation.
3. 12-by-12-inch square of walkway pads or rolls.
E. Installer Certificates: Signed by roofing system manufacturer certifying that Installer is approved,
authorized, or licensed by manufacturer to install roofing system.
F. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by roofing manufacturer certifying that roofing system complies
with requirements specified in "Performance Requirements" Article:
1. Submit evidence of meeting performance requirements.
2. Qualifications: Certify and document items in Article on Qualifications, and;
3. Products: Certify that selected products and roofing system meet or exceed specified
requirements, including that;
a. Roofing system components are physically and chemically compatible for
installation as designed, and;
b. All proposed materials, including those by other manufacturers, are acceptable to
membrane manufacturer for use in the system.;
c. Proposed system meets all criteria for issuance of required manufacturer’s warranty,
and;
d. Specifically identify and define any deviations.
4. Applicator: Certify that installation Contractor is approved by manufacturer for installation of
selected products and list foremen who have received training from manufacturer with dates
training was received.
G. Qualification Data: For Installer and manufacturer.
H. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by manufacturer and
witnessed by a qualified testing agency, for components of roofing system.
I. Research/Evaluation Reports: For components of membrane roofing system.
THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING [PVC] Section 07 54 00 - 4
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
J. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Include installation sequence, special instructions and Material
Safety Data Sheets (MSDS).
K. Daily Inspection Form: Check list document or form with signature line for Project Manager or
Superintendent, signifying installation is in accordance with specified requirements, and tie-ins and
temporary flashings are properly sealed at end of each working day and as otherwise required to ensure
water-tightness.
L. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Summarize findings of each inspection. Indicate any discrepancies from
recommended installation methods, corrective action recommended to installer, and any non-compliant
or unsatisfactory conditions.
M. Project Record Documents: Accurately record exact location of all roof membrane penetrations.
N. Maintenance Data: For completed roofing system to include in maintenance manuals.
O. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.
P. Inspection Report: Copy of roofing system manufacturer's inspection report of completed roofing
installation.
1.7 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that has UL listing for membrane roofing
system identical to that used for this Project, with minimum five years documented experience,
including:
1. Minimum three (3) projects of comparable size, using specified system, installed in the State
of Texas within that five-year period.
B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified firm that has been continuously approved, authorized, or licensed
by roofing system manufacturer to install manufacturer's product for minimum of three years prior to
Bid Date, and that is eligible to receive manufacturer's warranty; with minimum five years documented
experience, including:
1. Certified by roofing materials manufacturer as an approved NDL applicator for minimum of
two years prior to Bid Date, and qualified to provide specified warranty on selected systems
and flashings.
2. Minimum three projects of comparable size and specified systems during that time.
3. Company certified by the fume recovery system manufacturer as trained or approved to
properly operate and maintain selected equipment.
C. Workers: All roofers and laborers to be direct employees of Primary Contractor.
1. Project Manager and Superintendent: Minimum five years roofing experience and employed
by Contractor for a minimum one year prior to Bid Date.
2. Non-Working Supervisor: Able to communicate effectively with School staff and
Applicator’s workers and employed by Contractor for a minimum one year prior to Bid Date.
THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING [PVC] Section 07 54 00 - 5
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
Present on job site at all times Work is in progress.
3. Tradesmen: Minimum 50-percent of installation crew to have been employed by Contractor
for a minimum six months prior to Bid Date.
1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain components for membrane roofing system from or approved by roofing
membrane manufacturer.
B. Perform Work in accordance with NRCA Manual of Roof Maintenance and Roof Repair, NRCA
Roofing and Waterproofing Manual, and manufacturer's instructions.
C. Maintain one copy of each document accessible to site.
D. Install all roofing materials using personnel directly employed by Applicator (Roofing Contractor)
with NDL certification from roofing material manufacturer -no Sub-Contracting permitted.
E. Assign a qualified, full time, non-working supervisor to be on Project site at all times during
installation of Work.
F. Designate a responsible Project Manager or Superintendent to inspect all installed Work, particularly
tie-ins and temporary flashings, at end of each working day and as otherwise required to ensure water-
tightness.
1. Verify Inspection by signature on approved Daily Inspection Form signifying installation is in
accordance with specified requirements.
G. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. Comply with requirements in Division
01 Section "Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to roofing system including, but
not limited to, the following:
1. Meet with Owner, Architect, Owner's insurer if applicable, testing and inspecting agency
representative, roofing Installer, roofing system manufacturer's representative, deck Installer,
and installers whose work interfaces with or affects roofing including installers of roof
accessories and roof-mounted equipment.
2. Review methods and procedures related to roofing installation, including manufacturer's
written instructions.
3. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's
personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.
4. Examine deck substrate conditions and finishes for compliance with requirements, including
flatness and fastening.
5. Review demolition procedures and coordination with related work.
6. Review structural loading limitations of roof deck during and after roofing.
7. Review base flashings, special roofing details, roof drainage, roof penetrations, equipment
curbs, and condition of other construction that will affect roofing system.
8. Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance and certificates if applicable.
9. Review temporary protection requirements for roofing system during and after installation.
10. Review roof observation and repair procedures after roofing installation.
THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING [PVC] Section 07 54 00 - 6
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
1.9 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to applicable local codes for roof assembly fire hazard requirements and application
procedures.
B. Provide certification of inspection confirming approval of design and installation by authority having
jurisdiction.
C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide membrane roofing materials with the fire-test-response
characteristics indicated as determined by testing identical products per test method below by UL,
FMG, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Materials
shall be identified with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.
1. Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: Class A; ASTM E 108, for application and roof slopes indicated.
D. Comply with all submission requirements of the Texas Department of Insurance Windstorm Division
for Inland Zone-1.
1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver roofing materials to Project site in original containers with seals unbroken and labeled with
manufacturer's name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture, and directions for storing and
mixing with other components.
1. Inspect for damage. Remove from site and replace any damaged materials.
2. Store products in weather protected environment, clear of ground and moisture.
3. Stand and store roll materials on end.
B. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry, protected location and
within the temperature range required by roofing system manufacturer. Protect stored liquid material
from direct sunlight.
1. Discard and legally dispose of liquid material that cannot be applied within its stated shelf
life.
C. Protect roof insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by sunlight, moisture,
soiling, and other sources. Store in a dry location. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written
instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.
D. Handle and store roofing materials and place equipment in a manner to avoid permanent deflection of
deck.
1. Do not store more materials on roof than can be installed within two days, unless specifically
approved otherwise.
2. Maximum Allowable Loading on Roof: 20 pounds per square foot.
THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING [PVC] Section 07 54 00 - 7
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
1.11 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Maintain copies of Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) on site at all times during Work.
B. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions
permit roofing system to be installed according to manufacturer's written instructions and warranty
requirements.
1. Do not apply roofing membrane during inclement weather or when threat of inclement
weather exists.
2. Do not apply roofing membrane to damp or frozen deck surface.
3. Observe wind chill and other cold weather conditions for proper bituminous application.
C. Observe actual and predicted temperatures, relative humidity, wind, wind chill and other weather
conditions. Apply roofing system only when all conditions are within ranges acceptable to membrane
manufacturer.
D. Do not permit contaminants such as grease, fats and oils to come in direct contact with roofing
membrane.
1.12 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate with demolition work and with work of other trades to ensure sufficient materials and
manpower are available to completely replace and make watertight all roofing removed each day.
B. Limit tear off of existing roof system and application of new base sheet (if required), including
insulation, to amount that can be completely covered with new roof system by end of day.
C. Coordinate installation of associated metal flashings, and roof-related items as work of this Section
proceeds. Seal all sheet metal flanges in contact with membrane the day it is installed.
D. Schedule and execute Work to prevent leaks and excessive traffic on completed roof sections. Provide
protection for interior of building and to ensure water does not flow beneath any completed membrane
system sections.
E. Schedule work to avoid storage on and traffic over finished work.
1.13 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, without monetary limitation, in which manufacturer
agrees to repair or replace components of membrane roofing system that fail in materials or
workmanship within specified warranty period. Failure includes roof leaks.
1. Special warranty includes roofing membrane, base flashings, roofing membrane accessories,
roof insulation, fasteners, cover boards, substrate board, walkway products, and other
components of membrane roofing system.
2. Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.
THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING [PVC] Section 07 54 00 - 8
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
B. Special Project Warranty: Submit roofing Installer's warranty, on warranty form at end of this Section,
signed by Installer, covering Work of this Section, including all components of membrane roofing
system such as roofing membrane, base flashing, roof insulation, fasteners, cover boards, substrate
boards, vapor retarders, roof pavers, and walkway products, for the following warranty period:
1. Warranty Period: Two (2) years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product
selection:
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the products specified.
2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified.
3. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
manufacturers specified.
4. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the
manufacturers specified.
2.2 PVC ROOFING MEMBRANE
A. PVC Sheet: ASTM D 4434, Type III, fabric reinforced.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Sarnafil, Inc: Sikaplan Adhered / RC-543
b. IB Roof Systems: IB-PVC Single Ply / RC-243
c. Johns Manville: JM PVC 60 / RC-471
2. Thickness: 60-mils, nominal; plus or minus 2.0-mils.
3. Exposed Face Color: White.
2.3 AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A. General: Auxiliary materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer for intended use and
compatible with membrane roofing.
1. Liquid-type auxiliary materials shall meet VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Sheet Flashing: Manufacturer's standard sheet flashing of same material, type, reinforcement,
thickness, and color as PVC sheet membrane.
C. Pre-Fabricated Penetration Flashings: Components prefabricated from same reinforced thermoplastic
material as roofing membrane, or as recommended by membrane sheet manufacturer.
THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING [PVC] Section 07 54 00 - 9
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
D. Bonding Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard solvent-based bonding adhesive for membrane, and
solvent-based bonding adhesive for base flashings.
E. Slip Sheet: Manufacturer's recommended slip sheet, of type required for application.
F. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates meeting corrosion-resistance
provisions in FMG 4470; designed for fastening roofing membrane components to substrate; tested by
manufacturer for required pullout strength; and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer.
1. Corrosion Resistant Coating: Pass minimum 30 Kesternich cycles.
2. Membrane Fasteners: Designed for fastening membrane to substrate, and acceptable to
membrane roofing system manufacturer; sized to meet requirements to resist wind up-lift
pressures specified in Part 1 “Performance Requirements” of this Section.
a. Wood Blocking: High carbon, zinc coated steel; annular threaded 1-inch shank nails;
with minimum 1-inch x 30 gage metal disk; Roofing Nail, manufactured by Simplex
Nails, Inc.
b. Concrete: Power actuated fasteners, suitable for application.
G. Metal Termination Bars: Manufacturer's standard predrilled stainless-steel or aluminum bars,
approximately 1 by 1/8-inch-thick; with anchors.
H. Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide pourable sealers, preformed cone and vent sheet flashings,
preformed inside and outside corner sheet flashings, T-joint covers, termination reglets, cover strips,
and other accessories.
I. Membrane Termination Sealant: Compatible with membrane and materials to which membrane to be
bonded, conforming to Federal Specifications TT-598 and TT-S-00230C; approved by membrane
manufacturer.
J. Water Cut-Off Mastic: Compatible with materials with which it is used and approved by membrane
manufacturer.
K. Night Seal: Compatible with materials on which it is used and approved by membrane manufacturer.
L. Pitch Pocket Sealant: Single component, self-leveling silicone sealant approved by membrane
manufacturer.
M. Expansion Joint Filler:
1. Flexible Vapor Retarder: Minimum 60 mil thick vinyl sheet or approved equal.
2. Compressible Insulation: Fiberglass batt insulation or approved equal.
2.4 ROOF INSULATION
A. General: Provide preformed roof insulation boards that comply with requirements and referenced
standards, selected from manufacturer's standard sizes and of thicknesses indicated.
B. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, Type II, felt or glass-fiber mat facer on both major
surfaces; Class 1, Grade 3 rigid polyisocyanurate based closed-cell foam; CRC free; with appropriate
THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING [PVC] Section 07 54 00 - 10
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
facer to accommodate placement within cold adhered roof system; with following characteristics:
1. Board density: 2 pounds per cubic foot
2. Compressive Strength 20 pounds per square inch minimum
3. Board size: 48 x 48 inch
4. Board Thickness: 3-inch thickness minimum – thickness varies to achieve ¼-inch per foot at
back slope. Typical ½-inch per foot slope at crickets.
a. Roof structure slope is ¼-inch per foot. Back slope must be ½-inch per foot when
sloping to roof drain.
5. Thermal Conductivity: K factor of 0.36
6. Aged Thermal Value: R of 5.5 per inch minimum
7. Board Edges: Square
8. Manufacturers:
a. Atlas Roofing Corporation.
b. Hunter Materials Corporation
c. Johns Manville International, Inc.
d. RMAX
C. Cover Board: ASTM C 1177/C 1177M, glass-mat, water resistant gypsum substrate, ½-inch thick.
1. Dens-Deck Rigid, cover board. No substitutions.
a. Board Size: 48 x 48-inches
b. Board Thickness: ½-inch
c. Board Edges: Square
D. Tapered Insulation: Provide factory-tapered ASTM C 1289, Type II, Class 1, Grade 3 rigid
polyisocyanurate insulation boards with the same characteristics as above; fabricated to slope of ⅛-
inch per 12-inches, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Provide preformed saddles, crickets, tapered edge strips, and other insulation shapes where indicated
for sloping to drain. Fabricate to slopes indicated.
1. Cricket and Saddle Taper: 1/2-inch per foot minimum, or as required to counter existing roof
slope plus 1/2-per foot slope toward drains.
2. Edge Strips: Tapered as required by installation conditions.
2.5 INSULATION ACCESSORIES
A. General: Roof insulation accessories recommended by insulation manufacturer for intended use and
compatible with membrane roofing.
B. Cold Fluid-Applied Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard cold fluid-applied adhesive formulated to
adhere roof insulation to substrate.
THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING [PVC] Section 07 54 00 - 11
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
2.6 WALKWAYS
A. Flexible Walkways: Factory-formed, nonporous, heavy-duty, solid-rubber, slip-resisting, surface-
textured walkway pads or rolls, minimum ⅛-inch thick, compatible with membrane and acceptable to
membrane roofing system manufacturer. Color: Gray.
1. Pad Size: 12 x 30-inches
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with following
requirements and other conditions affecting performance of roofing system:
1. Verify that roof openings and penetrations are in place and set and braced and that roof drains
are securely clamped in place.
a. Verify that existing roof drains are not plugged or partially blocked.
2. Verify that wood blocking, curbs, and nailers are securely anchored to roof deck at
penetrations and terminations and that nailers match thicknesses of insulation.
3. Verify that minimum concrete drying period recommended by roofing system manufacturer
has passed.
4. Verify that lightweight insulating concrete substrate is visibly dry and free of moisture. Test
for capillary moisture by plastic sheet method according to ASTM D 4263.
5. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
6. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Protect building surfaces against damage from roofing work.
B. Clean substrate of dust, debris, moisture, and other substances detrimental to roofing installation
according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Remove sharp projections.
C. Prevent materials from entering and clogging roof drains and conductors and from spilling or
migrating onto surfaces of other construction. Remove roof-drain plugs when no work is taking place
or when rain is forecast.
D. Clean areas to be covered with Thermoplastic Membrane of all debris and deleterious materials
including, wet insulation, damaged decking, gravel, grease, and bird droppings according to membrane
manufacturer’s recommendations.
1. Remove loose gravel by power broom cleaning or vacuum.
E. Clean surfaces of roof and maintain free from all deleterious material during roofing operations.
F. Remove all unused accessories. Verify requirements with Owner’s Representative.
THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING [PVC] Section 07 54 00 - 12
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
G. Metal Deck: Verify flatness and integrity of existing decking.
3.3 INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Ensure existing roof deck is clean and dry.
B. Coordinate installing membrane roofing system components, so insulation is not exposed to
precipitation or left exposed at the end of the workday.
C. Comply with membrane roofing system manufacturer's written instructions for installing roof
insulation.
D. Install tapered insulation under area of roofing to conform to slopes indicated.
E. Install one or more layers of insulation under area of roofing to achieve required thickness. Where
overall insulation thickness is 2 inches or greater, install 2 or more layers with joints of each
succeeding layer staggered from joints of previous layer a minimum of 6 inches in each direction.
1. Minimum Total Insulation Thickness: 1 ½-inch insulation sloping to achieve minimum ¼-inch per foot slope and ¼-inch slope to roof drains, as indicated in the Drawings.
F. Trim surface of insulation where necessary at roof drains so completed surface is flush and does not
restrict flow of water.
G. Install insulation with long joints of insulation in a continuous straight line with end joints staggered
between rows, abutting edges and ends between boards. Fill gaps exceeding 1/4 inch with insulation.
1. Cut and fit insulation within 1/4 inch of nailers, projections, and penetrations.
H. Lay tapered boards for a distance of 36-inches back from roof drains for positive drainage.
I. Adhered Insulation: Install each layer of insulation and adhere to substrate as follows:
1. Set each layer of insulation in a cold fluid-applied adhesive.
J. Apply no more insulation and cant strips than can be sealed with membrane in same day.
3.4 MEMBRANE INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Install thermoplastic roofing membrane system according to roofing system manufacturer's written
instructions and applicable recommendations of NRCA's "Quality Control Guidelines for the
Application of Roofing."
B. Start installation of roofing membrane in presence of roofing system manufacturer's technical
personnel.
C. Unroll roofing membrane and allow to relax before installing.
THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING [PVC] Section 07 54 00 - 13
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
1. Install sheet according to ASTM D 5036.
D. Accurately align roofing membranes, without stretching, and maintain uniform side and end laps of
minimum dimensions required by manufacturer. Stagger end laps.
E. Cooperate with testing and inspecting agencies engaged or required to perform services for installing
built-up roofing system.
F. Coordinate installing roofing system components, so insulation and roofing membrane sheets are not
exposed to precipitation or left exposed at the end of the workday or when rain is forecast.
1. Provide tie-offs at end of each day's work to cover exposed roofing membrane sheets and
insulation with a course of coated felt with joints and edges sealed.
2. Complete terminations and base flashings and provide temporary seals to prevent water from
entering completed sections of roofing system.
3. Remove and discard temporary seals before beginning work on adjoining roofing.
G. Complete terminations and base flashings and provide temporary seals to prevent water from entering
completed sections of roofing system at the end of the workday or when rain is forecast. Remove and
discard temporary seals before beginning work on adjoining roofing.
H. Substrate-Joint Penetrations: Prevent adhesives from penetrating substrate joints, entering building, or
damaging roofing system components or adjacent building construction.
3.5 ADHERED ROOFING MEMBRANE INSTALLATION
A. Bonding Adhesive: Apply solvent-based bonding adhesive to substrate and underside of roofing
membrane at rate required by manufacturer and allow to partially dry before installing roofing
membrane. Do not apply bonding adhesive to splice area of roofing membrane.
B. Mechanically or adhesively fasten roofing membrane securely at terminations, penetrations, and
perimeter of roofing.
C. Apply roofing membrane with side laps shingled with slope of roof deck where possible.
D. Seams: Clean seam areas, overlap roofing membrane, and hot-air weld side and end laps of roofing
membrane according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure a watertight seam installation.
1. Test lap edges with probe to verify seam weld continuity. Apply lap sealant to seal cut edges
of roofing membrane.
2. Verify field strength of seams a minimum of twice daily and repair seam sample areas.
3. Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in roofing membrane that does not meet requirements.
E. Spread sealant or mastic bed over deck drain flange at deck drains and securely seal roofing membrane
in place with clamping ring.
THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING [PVC] Section 07 54 00 - 14
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
F. 3.6 BASE FLASHING INSTALLATION
A. Apply flashing membrane to seal deck membrane to vertical elements in accordance with selected
membrane system manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install sheet flashings and preformed flashing accessories and adhere to substrates according to
membrane roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Apply solvent-based bonding adhesive to substrate and underside of sheet flashing at required rate and
allow to partially dry. Do not apply bonding adhesive to seam area of flashing.
D. Flash penetrations and field-formed inside and outside corners with sheet flashing.
E. Clean seam areas and overlap and firmly roll sheet flashings into the adhesive. Weld side and end laps
to ensure a watertight seam installation.
F. Inspect flashing seams and repair unsealed locations, voids, and fishmouths.
G. Coordinate installation of roof drains, scuppers, sumps, and related flashings.
H. Scuppers: Install prefabricated, custom roof scuppers as indicated. Terminate outside lining with
termination bar and heat weld inside skirt to membrane. Apply sealant to underside of lining and top or
termination bar.
I. Expansion Joints: Install prefabricated custom expansion joints as indicated. Seal to deck membrane
and vertical surface as required for flashings.
J. Terminate and seal top of sheet flashings and mechanically anchor to substrate through termination
bars.
3.7 WALKWAY INSTALLATION
A. Flexible Walkways: Install walkway products in locations indicated. Heat weld to substrate or adhere
walkway products to substrate with compatible adhesive according to roofing system manufacturer’s
written instructions.
1. Locations: Where indicated and at each rooftop exhaust fan unit with operable components, at
base and top of each roof ladder, and at each roof hatch.
2. Install pads adjacent to each exhaust fan access panel; roof ladder, and on three (3) sides of
each roof hatch; or match width of access panel, ladder, or hatch plus 12-inches each side. Set
joints 6-inches apart.
3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform
roof tests and inspections and to prepare test reports.
THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING [PVC] Section 07 54 00 - 15
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
B. Field inspection and testing will be performed under provisions of Division 01 Section “Quality
Control”.
C. Upon substantial completion, Owner may have Work inspected using infrared scanning and other
appropriate means to establish conditions of completed Project.
D. Correct identified defects or irregularities. Cut out and repair membrane defects before end of each
day.
E. Do not perform demolition during roofing operations.
F. Final Roof Inspection: Arrange for roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel to inspect
roofing installation on completion and submit report to Architect.
1. Notify Architect or Owner 72 hours in advance of date and time of inspection.
2. Repair or remove and replace components of membrane roofing system where test results or
inspections indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements.
G. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance
of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
3.9 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES
A. Provide manufacturer's field services under provisions of Division 01 Section “Quality Control”.
B. Request site attendance of roofing materials manufacturers during installation of the work.
1. Frequency: Minimum of two (2) visits to project site each month during critical stages of
installation,
2. Coordination: Schedule visits to coincide with visits by Architect.
3.10 PROTECTING AND CLEANING
A. Where traffic must continue over finished roof installation, protect surfaces.
1. Minimum Protection: Cushion layer of insulation, minimum 1/2-inch thick, and one layer of
plywood minimum 3/4-inch thick. Ballast plywood for site and personnel protection.
B. Protect membrane roofing system from damage and wear during remainder of construction period.
When remaining construction will not affect or endanger roofing, inspect roofing for deterioration and
damage, describing its nature and extent in a written report, with copies to Architect and Owner.
C. Correct deficiencies in or remove membrane roofing system that does not comply with requirements,
repair substrates, and repair or reinstall membrane roofing system to a condition free of damage and
deterioration at time of Substantial Completion and according to warranty requirements.
THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING [PVC] Section 07 54 00 - 16
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
D. In areas where finished surfaces are soiled by adhesives, asphalt, or any other source of soiling caused
by work of this Section, consult manufacturer of surfaces for cleaning advice and conform to their
documented instructions.
E. Repair or replace defaced or disfigured finishes caused by Work of this Section.
F. Clean overspray and spillage from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures
recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.
3.11 FINAL TOUCH UP
A. Upon completion of all roof systems, flashing, accessory work and sheet metal applications, apply two
coats of approved aluminum roof coating to accessories not replaced and items as directed by Owner’s
Representative.
1. Paint existing pipes, drain strainers, metal vents, and other accessories with Type I aluminum
roof coating.
2. Apply at recommended rate, or at a minimum rate of ¾- to 1-gallon/square.
END OF SECTION
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM Section 07 62 00 - 1
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
SECTION 07 62 00 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes sheet metal flashing and trim in the following categories:
1. Exposed trim, gravel stops, and fasciae.
2. Copings; pre-finished galvanized metal
3. Metal flashing.
4. Reglets.
5. Counterflashing.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 01 Section 01450 – Windstorm Requirements
2. Division 04 Sections for through-wall flashing and other integral masonry flashings specified
as part of masonry work.
3. Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for elastomeric sealants.
4. Division 07 Roofing Sections for flashing and roofing accessories installed integral with
roofing membrane as part of roofing-system work.
5. Division 22, 23 and 26 for manufactured curbs/supports and penetrations provided by
Mechanical, Electrical and Plumbing contractors to be installed by this section.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to withstand wind loads, structural movement,
thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failing.
B. Fabricate and install flashings at roof edges to comply with requirements of the Texas Windstorm
Code.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and
Division 01 Specification Sections.
B. Product Data including manufacturer's material and finish data, installation instructions, and general
recommendations for each specified flashing material and fabricated product.
C. Shop Drawings of each item specified showing layout, profiles, methods of joining, and anchorage
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM Section 07 62 00 - 2
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
details.
D. Samples of sheet metal flashing, trim, and accessory items, in the specified finish. Where finish
involves normal color and texture variations, include Sample sets composed of 2 or more units
showing the full range of variations expected.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experience Installer who has completed sheet metal flashing and
trim work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of
successful in-service performance.
B. Mockups: Prior to installing sheet metal flashing and trim, construct mockups indicated to verify
selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects as well as qualities of
materials and execution. Build mockups to comply with the following requirements, using materials
indicated for final unit of Work.
1. Construct mockups for the following type of sheet metal flashing and trim:
a. Exposed trim, gravel stops, and fasciae.
b. Copings.
2. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before start of final unit of Work.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Coordinate Work of this Section with interfacing and adjoining Work for proper sequencing of each
installation. Ensure best possible weather resistance, durability of Work, and protection of materials
and finishes.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 METALS
A. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 526, G 90 (ASTM A 526M, Z 275), commercial quality, or
ASTM A 527, G 90 (ASTM A 527M, Z 275), lock-forming quality, hot-dip galvanized steel sheet
with 0.20 percent copper, mill phosphatized where indicated for painting; not less than 0.0396 inch
(1.0 mm) thick, unless otherwise indicated. All exposed trim flashing, fascia, and components shall
be manufactured from pre-finished metal provided by Berridge Company to match metal roof panels.
2.2 REGLETS
A. General: Units of type, material, and profile indicated, formed to provide secure interlocking of
separate reglet and counterflashing pieces and compatible with flashing indicated.
B. Surface-Mounted Type: Provide with slotted holes for fastening to substrate, with neoprene or other
suitable weatherproofing washers, and with channel for sealant at top edge.
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM Section 07 62 00 - 3
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
C. Stucco Type: Provide with upturned fastening flange and extension leg of length to match thickness
of applied finish materials.
D. Masonry Type: Provide with offset top flange for embedment in masonry mortar joint.
E. Flexible Flashing Retainer: Provide resilient plastic or rubber accessory to secure flexible flashing in
reglet where clearance does not permit use of standard metal counterflashing or where Drawings
show reglet without metal counterflashing.
F. Counterflashing Wind-Restraint Clips: Provide clips to be installed before counterflashing to prevent
wind uplift of the counterflashing lower edge.
1. Material: Galvanized steel, 0.0217 inch (0.55 mm) thick.
G. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products
that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Fry Reglet Corporation.
2. Hickman: W.P. Hickman Co.
3. Keystone Flashing Company.
2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS AND ACCESSORIES
A. Solder: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn50, used with rosin flux.
B. Fasteners: Same metal as sheet metal flashing or other noncorrosive metal as recommended by sheet
metal manufacturer. Match finish of exposed heads with material being fastened.
C. Asphalt Mastic: SSPC-Paint 12, solvent-type asphalt mastic, nominally free of sulfur and containing
no asbestos fibers, compounded for 15-mil (0.4-mm) dry film thickness per coat.
D. Mastic Sealant: Polyisobutylene; nonhardening, nonskinning, nondrying, nonmigrating sealant.
E. Elastomeric Sealant: Generic type recommended by sheet metal manufacturer and fabricator of
components being sealed and complying with requirements for joint sealants as specified in
Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."
F. Adhesives: Type recommended by flashing sheet metal manufacturer for waterproof and weather-
resistant seaming and adhesive application of flashing sheet metal.
G. Paper Slip Sheet: 5-lb/square (0.244 kg/sq. m) red rosin, sized building paper conforming to FS UU-
B-790, Type I, Style 1b.
H. Metal Accessories: Provide sheet metal clips, straps, anchoring devices, and similar accessory units
as required for installation of Work, matching or compatible with material being installed;
noncorrosive; size and thickness required for performance.
I. Gutter Screen: 1/4-inch (6-mm) hardware cloth installed in sheet metal frames. Fabricate screen and
frame of same basic material as gutters and downspouts.
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM Section 07 62 00 - 4
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
J. Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, Type I, asbestos free, asphalt based.
2.4 FABRICATION, GENERAL
A. Sheet Metal Fabrication Standard: Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with
recommendations of SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to the design,
dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of the item indicated.
B. Comply with details shown to fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim that fit substrates and result in
waterproof and weather-resistant performance once installed. Verify shapes and dimensions of
surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal.
C. Form exposed sheet metal Work that is without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and
that is true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems.
D. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams in sheet metal with flat-lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed,
form seams, and solder.
E. Expansion Provisions: Space movement joints at maximum of 10 feet (3 m) with no joints allowed
within 24 inches (610 mm) of corner or intersection. Where lapped or bayonet-type expansion
provisions in Work cannot be used or would not be sufficiently weatherproof and waterproof, form
expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch (25 mm) deep, filled with
mastic sealant (concealed within joints).
F. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion, but movable, joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant
to comply with SMACNA standards.
G. Separate metal from noncompatible metal or corrosive substrates by coating concealed surfaces at
locations of contact with asphalt mastic or other permanent separation as recommended by
manufacturer.
H. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are not allowed on
faces of sheet metal exposed to public view.
I. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as sheet metal component being
anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal recommended by sheet metal manufacturer.
1. Size: As recommended by SMACNA manual or sheet metal manufacturer for application but
never less than thickness of metal being secured.
2.5 SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS
A. General: Fabricate sheet metal items in thickness or weight needed to comply with performance
requirements but not less than that listed below for each application and metal.
B. Exposed Trim, Gravel Stops, and Fasciae: Fabricate from the following material:
1. Pre-finished Galvanized Steel: 0.0276 inch (0.7 mm) thick.
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM Section 07 62 00 - 5
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
C. Copings: Fabricate from the following material:
1. Galvalume finished Galvanized Steel: 0.0396 inch (1.0 mm) thick. Match brick color.
D. Exposed to view Counterflashing, Flashing Receivers, Drip Edges: Fabricate from the following
material:
1. Pre-finished Galvanized Steel: 0.0217 inch (0.55 mm) thick.
E. Equipment Support Flashing: Fabricate from the following material:
1. Stainless Steel: 0.0276 inch (0.7 mm) thick.
F. Roof-Penetration Flashing: Fabricate from the following material:
1. Lead: 4.0 lb/sq. ft. (16 mm thick), hard tempered.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions under which sheet metal flashing and trim are to be installed and
verify that Work may properly commence. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory
conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, install sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with
performance requirements, manufacturer's installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural
Sheet Metal Manual." Anchor units of Work securely in place by methods indicated, providing for
thermal expansion of metal units; conceal fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and
level as indicated. Install Work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and
weatherproof.
B. Install exposed sheet metal Work that is without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and
that is true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. Install sheet
metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in waterproof and weather-resistant
performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal.
C. Roof-Edge Flashings: Secure metal flashings at roof edges according to FM Loss Prevention Data
Sheet 1-49 for specified wind zone.
D. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed sheet metal Work. Space
movement joints at maximum of 10 feet (3 m) with no joints allowed within 24 inches (610 mm) of
corner or intersection. Where lapped or bayonet-type expansion provisions in Work cannot be used
or would not be sufficiently weatherproof and waterproof, form expansion joints of intermeshing
hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch (25 mm) deep, filled with mastic sealant (concealed within
joints).
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM Section 07 62 00 - 6
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
E. Soldered Joints: Clean surfaces to be soldered, removing oils and foreign matter. Pretin edges of
sheets to be soldered to a width of 1-1/2 inches (38 mm), except where pretinned surface would show
in finished Work.
1. Do not solder to coil-coated galvanized steel sheet.
2. Do not use torches for soldering. Heat surfaces to receive solder and flow solder into joint.
Fill joint completely. Completely remove flux and spatter from exposed surfaces.
F. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion, but movable, joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant
to comply with SMACNA standards. Fill joint with sealant and form metal to completely conceal
sealant.
1. Use joint adhesive for nonmoving joints specified not to be soldered.
G. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams in sheet metal with flat-lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed,
form seams, and solder.
H. Separations: Separate metal from noncompatible metal or corrosive substrates by coating concealed
surfaces, at locations of contact, with asphalt mastic or other permanent separation as recommended
by manufacturer.
I. Install reglets to receive counterflashing according to the following requirements:
1. Where reglets are shown in masonry, furnish reglets for installation under Division 04 Section
"Unit Masonry."
J. Counterflashing: Coordinate installation of counterflashing with installation of assemblies to be
protected by counterflashing. Install counterflashing in reglets or receivers. Secure in a waterproof
manner by means of snap-in installation and sealant, lead wedges and sealant, interlocking folded
seam, or blind rivets and sealant. Lap counterflashing joints a minimum of 2 inches (50 mm) and
bed with sealant.
K. Roof-Drainage System: Install drainage items fabricated from sheet metal, with straps, adhesives,
and anchors recommended by SMACNA's Manual or the item manufacturer, to drain roof in the
most efficient manner. Coordinate roof-drain flashing installation with roof-drainage system
installation. Coordinate flashing and sheet metal items for steep-sloped roofs with roofing
installation.
L. Equipment Support Flashing: Coordinate equipment support flashing installation with roofing and
equipment installation. Weld or seal flashing to equipment support member.
M. Roof-Penetration Flashing: Coordinate roof-penetration flashing installation with roofing and
installation of items penetrating roof. Install flashing as follows:
1. Turn lead flashing down inside vent piping, being careful not to block vent piping with
flashing.
2. Seal and clamp flashing to pipes penetrating roof, other than lead flashing on vent piping.
N. Install continuous gutter screens on gutters with noncorrosive fasteners, arranged as hinged units to
swing open for cleaning gutters.
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM Section 07 62 00 - 7
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean exposed metal surfaces, removing substances that might cause corrosion of metal or
deterioration of finishes.
B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure sheet metal flashing and trim Work
during construction is without damage or deterioration other than natural weathering at the time of
Substantial Completion.
3.4 SCHEDULE OF FINISHES
A. All exposed finishes shall be Berridge, Pre-finished metallic; as selected by Architect.
END OF SECTION
ROOF ACCESSORIES Section 07 72 00 - 1
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
SECTION 07 72 00 - ROOF ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Roof curbs.
2. Equipment supports.
3. Roof hatches.
4. Telescoping Post.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for ladders and miscellaneous metal framing and
supports.
2. Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry" for roof sheathing, wood cants, and wood nailers.
3. Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for shop- and field-fabricated metal
flashing and counterflashing, scuppers, fasciae, valleys, and miscellaneous sheet metal trim
and accessories.
4. Division 07 Sections for roofing accessories included as part of roofing Work.
5. Division 09 Section "Painting" for shop primers and field painting.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, materials,
dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details. Indicate dimensions, weights, loadings,
required clearances, method of field assembly, and components. Include plans, elevations, sections,
details, and attachments to other Work.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Standards: Comply with the following:
1. SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" details for fabrication of units, including
flanges and cap flashing to coordinate with type of roofing indicated.
2. NRCA's "Roofing and Waterproofing Manual" details for installing units.
ROOF ACCESSORIES Section 07 72 00 - 2
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products
that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Roof Curbs and Equipment Supports:
a. Curbs Plus, Inc.
b. Custom Curb, Inc.
c. Pate Co.(The).
d. ThyCurb, Inc.
2. Roof Hatches:
a. Bilco Company.
b. Milcor, Inc.
2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M with G90 (Z275) coating designation; commercial
quality, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Structural Quality: Grade 40 (Grade 275), where indicated or as required for strength.
B. Plastic Sheet: Unless additional thickness is required for light transmittances, provide glazing plastic
sheet thickness required for 40-lbf/sq. ft. (1.9-kPa) external and 20-lbf/sq. ft. (0.95-kPa) internal
loading pressures as recommended by the manufacturer for the size and shape indicated.
1. Acrylic: ASTM D 4802, thermoformable, cell-cast or continuous-cast acrylic (methacrylate),
Category A-1 or A-2, Type UVA containing ultraviolet absorber, with smooth or polished
Finish 1, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Polycarbonate: Thermoformable, monolithic polycarbonate sheets manufactured by the
extrusion process, burglar-resistance rated per UL 972 with average impact strength of 16 ft-
lbf/in. (850 J/m) of width when tested according to ASTM D 256, Method A (Izod).
C. Insulation: Manufacturer's standard rigid or semirigid glass-fiber board of thickness indicated.
D. Wood Nailers: Softwood lumber, pressure treated with waterborne preservatives for aboveground
use, complying with AWPA C2; not less than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) thick.
E. Security Grilles: 3/4-inch- (19-mm-) diameter, hardened steel bars spaced 6 inches (150 mm) o.c. in
one direction and 12 inches (300 mm) o.c. in the other. Weld bar intersections and ends of bars to
structural frame or primary curb walls. Clean and paint with rust-inhibitive metal primer.
F. Fasteners: Same metal as metals being fastened, or nonmagnetic stainless steel or other noncorrosive
metal as recommended by manufacturer. Match finish of exposed fasteners with finish of material
being fastened.
1. Where removing exterior exposed fasteners affords access to building, provide nonremovable
fastener heads.
ROOF ACCESSORIES Section 07 72 00 - 3
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
G. Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard tubular or fingered design of neoprene, EPDM, or PVC; or flat
design of foam rubber, sponge neoprene, or cork.
H. Bituminous Coating: SSPC-Paint 12, solvent-type bituminous mastic, nominally free of sulfur and
containing no asbestos fibers, compounded for 15-mil (0.4-mm) dry film thickness per coating.
I. Mastic Sealant: Polyisobutylene; nonhardening, nonskinning, nondrying, nonmigrating sealant.
J. Elastomeric Sealant: Generic type recommended by unit manufacturer that is compatible with joint
surfaces; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, and Uses NT, G, A, and, as applicable to joint
substrates indicated, O.
K. Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, nonasbestos, fibrated asphalt cement designed for trowel
application or other adhesive compatible with roofing system.
2.3 ROOF CURBS
A. General: Provide roof curbs capable of supporting superimposed live and dead loads, including
equipment loads and other construction to be supported on roof curbs. Coordinate dimensions with
rough-in information or Shop Drawings of equipment to be supported.
B. Fabrication: Unless otherwise indicated or required for strength, fabricate units from minimum
0.0747-inch- (1.9-mm-) thick, structural-quality, hot-dip galvanized or aluminum-zinc alloy-coated
steel sheet; factory primed and prepared for painting with welded or sealed mechanical corner joints.
C. Fabrication: Unless otherwise indicated or required for strength, fabricate units from minimum
0.063-inch- (1.6-mm-) thick, sheet aluminum with welded corner joints.
1. Provide preservative-treated wood nailers at tops of curbs and formed flange at perimeter
bottom for mounting to roof.
2. On ribbed or fluted metal roofs, form flange at perimeter bottom to conform to roof profile.
3. Provide manufacturer's standard rigid or semirigid insulation where indicated.
4. Provide formed cants and base profile coordinated with roof insulation thickness.
5. Fabricate units to minimum height of 8 inches (200 mm), unless otherwise indicated.
6. Sloping Roofs: Where slope of roof deck exceeds 1/4 inch per foot (1:48), fabricate curb
units with water diverter or cricket and with height tapered to match slope to level tops of
units.
2.4 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
A. General: Provide equipment supports capable of supporting superimposed live and dead loads,
including equipment loads and other construction to be supported. Coordinate dimensions with
rough-in information or Shop Drawings of equipment to be supported.
B. Fabrication: Unless otherwise indicated or required for strength, fabricate units from minimum
0.0747-inch- (1.9-mm-) thick, structural-quality, hot-dip galvanized or aluminum-zinc alloy-coated
steel sheet; factory primed and prepared for painting with welded or sealed mechanical corner joints.
ROOF ACCESSORIES Section 07 72 00 - 4
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
C. Fabrication: Unless otherwise indicated or required for strength, fabricate units from minimum
0.063-inch- (1.6-mm-) thick, sheet aluminum with welded corner joints.
1. Provide preservative-treated wood nailers at tops of curbs and formed flange at perimeter
bottom for mounting to roof.
2. On ribbed or fluted metal roofs, form flange at perimeter bottom to conform to roof profile.
3. Fabricate units to minimum height of 8 inches (200 mm), unless otherwise indicated.
4. Sloping Roofs: Where slope of roof deck exceeds 1/4 inch per foot (1:48), fabricate support
units with height tapered to match slope to level tops of units.
2.5 ROOF HATCHES
A. Unit: 36 x 30 inch size (hinged on the 30 inch size), single leaf type.
B. Integral Steel Curb: 14 gauge prime painted galvanized steel with 1 inch rigid glass fiber insulation;
integral cap flashing to receive roof flashing; extended flange for mounting.
C. Flush Steel Cover: 14 gauge prime painted galvanized steel; 1 inch glass fiber insulation;
sandwiched by 22 gauge steel interior liner; continuous gasket to provide weatherproof seal.
D. Hardware:
1. Compression spring operator and shock absorbers.
2. Steel manual pull handle for interior and exterior operation.
3. Steel hold open arm with vinyl covered grip handle for easy release.
4. Components shall be zinc plated and chromate sealed.
5. Padlock hasp.
6. Heavy pintle hinges.
E. Telescoping Safety Post:
1. Bilco Model LU-2.
2. Install on fixed ladder below each hatch cover. Device shall be hot dip galvanized steel. It
shall be designed with telescoping tubular section that locks automatically when fully
extended. Upward and downward movement shall be controlled by a stainless steel spring
balancing mechanism. Unit shall be completely assembled with fasteners for securing to the
ladder rungs in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
F. Material: Galvanized steel.
1. Finish: Prime painted.
G. Sloping Roofs: Where slope or roof deck exceeds 1/4 inch per foot (1:48), fabricate hatch curbs with
height tapered to match slope to level tops of units.
2.6 FINISHES, GENERAL
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
ROOF ACCESSORIES Section 07 72 00 - 5
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary
protective covering before shipping.
C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are
acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the
same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they
are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
2.7 GALVANIZED STEEL SHEET FINISHES
A. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces with nonpetroleum solvent so surfaces are free of oil and other
contaminants. After cleaning, apply a conversion coating suited to the organic coating to be applied
over it. Clean welds, mechanical connections, and abraded areas, and apply galvanizing repair paint
specified below to comply with ASTM A 780.
1. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for regalvanizing welds in steel,
complying with SSPC-Paint 20.
B. Factory Priming for Field-Painted Finish: Where field painting after installation is indicated, apply
the air-dried primer specified below immediately after cleaning and pretreating.
1. Shop Primer: Exterior galvanized metal primer per Division 9 Section "Painting."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Coordinate installation of roof
accessories with installation of roof deck, roof insulation, flashing, roofing membranes, penetrations,
equipment, and other construction involving roof accessories to ensure that each element of the Work
performs properly and that combined elements are waterproof and weathertight. Anchor roof
accessories securely to supporting structural substrates so they are capable of withstanding lateral
and thermal stresses, and inward and outward loading pressures.
B. Install roof accessory items according to construction details of NRCA's "Roofing and
Waterproofing Manual," unless otherwise indicated,
C. Separation: Separate metal from incompatible metal or corrosive substrates, including wood, by
coating concealed surfaces, at locations of contact, with bituminous coating or providing other
permanent separation.
D. Flange Seals: Unless otherwise indicated, set flanges of accessory units in a thick bed of roofing
cement to form a seal.
ROOF ACCESSORIES Section 07 72 00 - 6
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
E. Cap Flashing: Where required as component of accessory, install cap flashing to provide waterproof
overlap with roofing or roof flashing (as counterflashing). Seal overlap with thick bead of mastic
sealant.
F. Operational Units: Test-operate units with operable components. Clean and lubricate joints and
hardware. Adjust for proper operation.
3.2 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions. Touch up damaged metal
coatings.
END OF SECTION
JOINT SEALANTS Section 07 92 00 - 1
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
SECTION 07 92 00 - JOINT SEALANTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUBMITTALS
A. In addition to product data submit the following:
1. Samples of each type and color of joint sealant required.
2. Certified test reports for joint sealants evidencing compliance with requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 COMPATIBILITY
A. Provide joint sealants, joint fillers, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and
with joint substrates under service and application conditions, as demonstrated by testing and field
experience.
2.2 COLORS
A. Provide color indicated of exposed joint sealants or, if not otherwise indicated, as selected by Architect
from manufacturer's standard colors.
2.3 ELASTOMERIC SEALANT STANDARD
A. Provide manufacturer's standard chemically curing, elastomeric sealant of base polymer indicated
complying with ASTM C920 requirements.
1. One-Part, Neutral-Curing Silicone Sealant: Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, and as follows:
a. Uses NT, M, G, A, and O.
b. Products: Trimco Spectrem 1 or Sika - SikaSil WS-290
2. Multi-Part, Nonsag Urethane Sealant for Use NT: Type M, Grade NS, Class 25, and as follows:
a. Uses NT, M, A, and O.
b. Dymeric Manufactured by Trimco or NP-2 by Sonneborn.
3. One-Part, Pourable Urethane Sealant for Use T: Type S, Grade P, Class 25, and as follows:
a. Uses T, M, A, and O. **Dymonic manufactured by Trimco or NP-1 by Sonneborn.
4. One-Part Pourable Polyurethane Sealant, Nonsagging as Follows:
a. Uses: Walkways and Traffic Paving
b. SL-1 by Sonneborn.
5. Security Sealant: Dynaflex by Pecora; Elastomenic Polyurethane Joint Sealant; ASTM C902-86;
Two-Part Nonsagging Cold Applied; Shore A-55 Plus Tamper and Abuse-Resistant Sealant.
JOINT SEALANTS Section 07 92 00 - 2
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
2.4 BUTYL SEALANT
A. Manufacturer's standard one-part, nonsag, solvent-release-curing, polymerized butyl sealant complying
with ASTM C 1085 and formulated with minimum of 75 percent solids to be nonstaining, paintable, and
have a tack-free time of 24 hours or less. Black color; butyl sealant by Tnemec.
2.5 ACRYLIC-EMULSION SEALANT
A. One-part, nonsag, mildew-resistant, paintable, acrylic-emulsion sealant complying with ASTM C 834.
2.6 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT
A. Nonsag, paintable, nonstaining, latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834 and effective in reducing
airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as
demonstrated by testing representative assemblies per ASTM E 90.
2.7 TAPE SEALANT
A. Solvent-free, butyl-based tape sealant with a solids content of 100 percent formulated to be nonstaining,
paintable, and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces with or without reinforcement thread to
prevent stretch and packaged on rolls with release paper on one side.
2.8 SEALANT BACKINGS, GENERAL
A. Nonstaining; compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; approved for
applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.
1. Plastic Foam Joint Fillers: Preformed, compressible, resilient, nonwaxing, nonextruding strips of
plastic foam of material indicated below, and of size, shape, and density to control sealant depth
and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance.
a. Closed-cell polyethylene foam, nonabsorbent to liquid water and gas, nonoutgassing in
unruptured state.
2. Elastomeric Tubing Joint Fillers: Neoprene, butyl, EPDM, or silicone tubing complying with
ASTM D 1056, nonabsorbent to water and gas, and capable of remaining resilient at temperatures
down to -26 deg F (-32 deg C).
3. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape as recommended by sealant
manufacturer for preventing bond between sealant and joint filler or other materials at back of
joint.
2.9 PRIMER
A. As recommended by joint sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates
indicated.
JOINT SEALANTS Section 07 92 00 - 3
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work and field measurements are as shown on Drawings and
recommended by the manufacturer.
B. Beginning of installation means installer accepts existing surfaces.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean and prime joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Remove loose materials and foreign matter which might impair adhesion of sealant.
C. Verify that joint backing and release tapes are compatible with sealant.
D. Perform preparation in accordance with ASTM C804 for solvent release and C790 for latex base sealants.
E. Protect elements surrounding the work of this Section from damage or disfiguration.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install sealant in accordance with manufacturer's instruction.
B. Measure joint dimensions and size materials to achieve required width/depth ratios.
C. Install joint backing to achieve a neck dimension no greater than 1/3 the joint width.
D. Install bond breaker where joint backing is not used.
E. Apply sealant within recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when sealant
cannot be applied within these temperature ranges.
F. Install sealant free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges and sags.
G. Tool joints concave.
H. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with ASTM C 1193.
I. Acoustical Sealant Application Standard: Comply with ASTM C 919 for use of joint sealants in acoustical
applications.
3.4 CLEANING AND REPAIRING
A. Clean work under provisions of Section 01700 “Contract Closeout”.
JOINT SEALANTS Section 07 92 00 - 4
White Gymnasium Rebuild WKMC Architects, Inc. Project No. 18022
Aransas County Independent School District October 26, 2018
B. Clean adjacent soiled surfaces.
C. Repair or replace defaced or disfigured finishes caused by work in this Section.
3.5 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK
A. Protect finished installation under provisions of Section 01500 “Construction Facilities and Temporary
Controls”.
B. Protect sealants until cured.
3.6 SCHEDULE
Location Type Color
A. Window Perimeter: Silicone, Gray or Bronze -
Single Component to match frame
B. Brick, Plaster, and Concrete
Masonry:
Silicone, Color as Selected –
Single Component by Architect
C. Door Frame / Walls: Silicone – Single Component Color to Suit Condition
D. Under Thresholds Butyl Rubber Black
E. Plumbing Fixtures / Ceramic
Tile Silicone, Fungus Resistant White
F. All Other Interior Acrylic Latex Joints Color to Suit Condition
G. Building Expansion Joint Polyurethane, Color as
Selected – Multi-Components by Architect
END OF SECTION